2018 Subaru Forester Owner Manual

User Manual: 2018 Subaru Forester Owner's Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 636 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2837712_18a_Subaru_Forester_OM_021717_LR
2837712-MSA5M1802A Forester-text_DID
Blank Page
Blank Page

2018 Forester Owner’s Manual

A8230BE-A

Issued April 2017

Printed in USA 04/17

2018A

SUBARU CORPORATION

TOKYO, JAPAN

Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,

P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please see

your Subaru Retailer for a Product Brochure

detailing all currently available models.

MSA5M1802A

2018

Love. It’s what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.

Forester

OWNER’S MANUAL

2837712_18a_Subaru_Forester_OM_030717.indd 1 3/7/17 3:27 PM

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU

CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of SUBARU CORPORATION.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Warranties

&Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

.SUBARU Limited Warranty

.Emission Control Systems Warranty

.Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

&Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

.SUBARU Limited Warranty

.Anti-Corrosion Warranty

.Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Read

these warranties carefully.

&Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

&Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS

airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

–CONTINUED –

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem while driving, such as a

flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

For models with the EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

&Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understand-

ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

&Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”,“Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

&Abbreviation list

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner

ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA Blind Spot Detection/Rear

Cross Traffic Alert

CVT Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

INT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRF Steering responsive fog lights

system

SRH Steering Responsive Head-

light

SRS Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights”F23.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Safety precautions when

driving

&Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

.All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

.To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not do away with the need

to fasten seatbelts. In combina-

tion with the seatbelts, it offers

the best combined protection in

case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

.The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

.For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts”F1-16.

.For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)”F1-43.

&Child safety

WARNING

.Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

.While riding in the vehicle, in-

fants and small children should

always be placed in the REAR

seat in an infant or child restraint

system which is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a

child restraint system, the child

should sit in the REAR seat and

be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. Never allow a child

to stand up or kneel on the seat.

.Place children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

.NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD

OR REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-

JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-

BAG.

.Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK”position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Child

safety locks”F2-32.

.Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows”F2-32.

.Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

temperature in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to them.

.When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

.In models with power rear gate,

when it operates, the rear gate

moves with remarkable force. It

is possible to be injured if any-

one is caught in or hit by the rear

gate so be sure to obey the

following cautions.

–Check that there are no chil-

dren around the rear gate

before operating the power

rear gate.

–Do not allow children to oper-

ate the power rear gate.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

.For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts”F1-16.

–CONTINUED –

.For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems”F1-30.

.For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)”F1-43.

&Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

.Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

.Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

.Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

.Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

.Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

.If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

.Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

&Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction time

and impairs your perception, judg-

ment and attentiveness. If you drive

after drinking –even if you drink just

a little –it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most

frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-

hol affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-

tely before getting behind the wheel.

&Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’and other persons’risk

of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can

make you drowsy or otherwise affect your

ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requires

you to take drugs, please consult with

your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

&Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction time will be delayed and

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness will be impaired. If you

drive when tired or sleepy, your,

your passengers’and other per-

sons’chances of being involved in

a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but

instead find a safe place to rest if you

are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you

should make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

&Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

&Car phone/cell phone and

driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and can lead

to an accident. If you use a car

phone/cell phone, pull off the road

and park in a safe place before

using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

&Driving vehicles equipped

with navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving

could lead to an accident. If you

wish to operate the controls of the

navigation system, first take the

vehicle off the road and stop it in a

safe location.

&Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

–CONTINUED –

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consult your veterinarian,

local animal protection society or pet

shop.

&Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the spare)

at least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard. For detailed information, refer

to “Tires and wheels”F11-23.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

&On-road and off-road driving

This vehicle is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground

clearance and higher center of gravity,

making it more likely to roll over than

ordinary passenger cars. It also handles

and maneuvers differently from other

passenger cars. For this reason, please

read carefully the following section and

follow the instructions and precautions in

order to prevent serious injury or death

due to loss of control, rollover and other

accidents. Refer to “On-road and off-road

driving”F8-6.

&Attaching accessories

WARNING

.Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

.If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

General information

&California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

&California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

Certain vehicle components such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

&Noise from under the vehicle

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the engine is turned off. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

This noise is caused by the operation

of the fuel evaporation leakage check-

ing system and the operation is normal.

The noise will stop after approximately

15 minutes.

&Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,

data that will assist in understanding how

a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for

a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

.How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

.Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

.Howfar(ifatall)thedriverwas

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

.How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

————————————————————————————————————————

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2

Instruments and controls

Climate control 4

Audio 5

Interior equipment 6

Starting and operating 7

Driving tips 8

In case of emergency 9

Appearance care 10

Maintenance and service 11

Specifications 12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13

Index 14

Illustrated index

&Exterior

1) Engine hood (page 11-7)

2) Headlight (page 3-93)

3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-39)

4) Front wiper (page 3-105)

5) Moonroof (page 2-46)

6) Roof rails (page 8-14)

7) Door locks (page 2-6)

8) Outside mirrors (page 3-116)

9) Tire pressure (page 11-25)

10) Flat tires (page 9-5)

11) Snow tires (page 8-11)

12) Fog light (page 3-102)

13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)

14) Towing hook (page 9-13)

1) Rear window defogger (page 3-116)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-32)

4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)

5) Rear gate (page 2-38)

6) Towing hook (page 9-13)

–CONTINUED –

&Interior

!Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-38)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-16)

3) Front seat (page 1-2)

4) Rear seat heater switch (page 1-10)

5) Rear seat (page 1-11)

6) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE

For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU

STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-

ual supplement for SUBARU

STARLINK.

1) Power windows (page 2-32)

2) Door locks (page 2-6)

3) Glove box (page 6-6)

4) Front power supply socket (page 6-9)

5) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-22)/Select lever

(CVT) (page 7-25)

6) Parking brake lever (page 7-48)

7) Cup holder (page 6-7)

8) Center console (page 6-6)

–CONTINUED –

&Instrument panel 1) Outside mirror switch (page 3-116)

2) Seat position memory switch (page 1-5)

3) Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

switch (models with Steering Respon-

sive Headlight) (page 3-99)/Steering re-

sponsive fog light off switch (if equipped)

(page 3-103)

4) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-101)

5) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-59)

6) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models without power rear gate)

(page 7-41)/Memory switch (models with

power rear gate) (page 2-43)

7) Combination meter (page 3-9)

8) Information display (page 3-34)/Multi

function display (page 3-44)

9) Hazard warning flasher switch (models

with multi function display) (page 3-8)

10) Hazard warning flasher switch (models

without multi function display) (page 3-8)

11) Multi function display control switch

(page 3-44)

12) Audio (page 5-1)

13) Climate control (page 4-1)

14) Power rear gate switch (page 2-39)

15) Fuse box (page 11-37)

16) Hood lock release (page 11-7)

17) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models with power rear gate)

(page 7-41)

&Steering wheel 1) Audio control switches (page 5-63)

2) Talk switch for voice command system

(page 5-81)

3) Cruise control (page 7-54)

4) Shift paddle (page 7-28)

5) Tilt/telescopic lock lever (page 3-118)

6) Hands-free phone switches (page 5-73)

7) Multi information display control switches

(page 3-39)

8) SRS airbag (page 1-43)

9) Horn (page 3-119)

10) Heated steering wheel switch

(page 3-119)

11) SI-DRIVE switches (page 7-34)

–CONTINUED –

&Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-104)

2) Mist (page 3-105)

3) Windshield washer (page 3-106)

4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-106)

5) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-105)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-105)

7) Light control switch (page 3-93)

8) Fog light switch (page 3-102)

9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-93)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-95)

11) Turn signal lever (page 3-100)

&Combination meter

!U.S.-spec. models (type A)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter

may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31)

3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)

4) Speedometer (page 3-10)

5) Information display selection knob

(page 3-34)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)

7) X-mode (if equipped) (page 7-43)/SI-

DRIVE (if equipped) (page 7-32)

8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

–CONTINUED –

!U.S.-spec. models (type B)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter

may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11)

2) Multi information display (page 3-39)

3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)

4) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31)

5) Speedometer (page 3-10)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)

!Canada-spec. and Mexico-spec. models (type A)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter

may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11)

2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31)

4) Speedometer (page 3-10)

5) Information display selection knob

(page 3-34)

6) ECO gauge (Mexico-spec. models)

(page 3-12)

7) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)

8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

–CONTINUED –

!Canada-spec. and Mexico-spec. models (type B)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter

may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-11)

2) Multi information display (page 3-39)

3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)

4) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31)

5) Speedometer (page 3-10)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-10)

7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)

&Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-14

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light 3-14

SRS airbag system

warning light 3-15

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON indi-

cator

3-16

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator

3-16

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Malfunc-

tion indicator light

3-16

Coolant temperature

low indicator light/

Coolant temperature

high warning light

3-17

Charge warning light 3-18

Oil pressure warning

light 3-18

Engine low oil level

warning light 3-18

Mark Name Page

AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models) 3-19

ABS warning light 3-21

Brake system warning

light 3-21

Door open warning

light 3-23

AWD warning light

(CVT models) 3-23

Power steering warn-

ing light 3-23

Hill start assist warn-

ing light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light

3-23

Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light

3-24

Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator

light

3-25

Turn signal indicator

lights 3-32

Mark Name Page

High beam indicator

light 3-32

High beam assist indi-

cator light (if equipped) 3-32

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (if equipped)

3-32

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning

light/Steering Respon-

sive Headlight OFF

indicator light (if

equipped)

3-99

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped) 3-33

Access key warning

light (if equipped) 3-26

Security indicator light 3-30

Headlight indicator

light (if equipped) 3-33

Cruise control indica-

tor light 3-32

Cruise control set in-

dicator light 3-32

–CONTINUED –

Mark Name Page

X-mode indicator light

(if equipped) 3-33

Hill descent control in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

3-33

Low fuel warning light 3-22

Low tire pressure

warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)

3-19

Windshield washer

fluid warning light 3-19

Sport (S) mode indi-

cator light (if equipped) 3-31

Intelligent (I) mode in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

3-31

Sport Sharp (S#)

mode indicator light (if

equipped)

3-31

Steering responsive

fog lights warning in-

dicator/Steering re-

sponsive fog lights

OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-33

BSD/RCTA warning

indicator (if equipped) 3-33

Mark Name Page

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped) 3-34

RAB warning light (if

equipped) 3-34

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped) 3-34

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions

can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Multi function display”F3-44.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Impact sensor operation (only models with shock

sensors (dealer option))

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Passive arming (models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Dome light and map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Door unlock selection function (driver’s door unlock) Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only

Door unlock selection function (rear gate unlock) Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Defogger and deicer system for models

with the automatic climate control system

Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and

windshield wiper deicer

Operation for 15 minutes/

Continuous operation

Operation for 15

minutes

–CONTINUED –

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Dome light Operation of dome light/map light/cargo area light OFF

delay timer

OFF/10 seconds/20 sec-

onds/30 seconds

30 seconds

Map light

Cargo area light

Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Mid/High/Max Mid

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation Operation/Non-operation Non-operation*

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer Operation/Non-operation Operation

High beam assist function (if equipped) High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Welcome lighting function (if equipped) Welcome lighting function (when approaching) OFF/30 seconds/60 sec-

onds/90 seconds

30 seconds

Welcome lighting function (when exiting) OFF/30 seconds/60 sec-

onds/90 seconds

30 seconds

: Except for U.S. model, the default setting will be “Operation”.

Front seats........................................................... 1-2

Manual seat ........................................................ 1-4

Power seat (driver’s seat —if equipped) .............. 1-5

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-9

Front seat heater (if equipped)............................ 1-10

Rear seat heater (if equipped)............................. 1-10

Rear seats........................................................... 1-11

Armrest (if equipped).......................................... 1-12

Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-12

Folding down the rear seatback.......................... 1-13

Reclining the seatback (if equipped) ................... 1-15

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-16

Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-16

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-17

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ......................................... 1-18

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-18

Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-18

Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-25

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-25

Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-25

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt

pretensioners................................................... 1-27

System monitors ................................................ 1-28

System servicing ............................................... 1-28

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-29

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-30

Safety tips for installing child restraint

systems .......................................................... 1-31

Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-31

Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-33

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR

seatbelt ........................................................... 1-33

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-37

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-38

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-41

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................ 1-43

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system ............................................................ 1-43

Components...................................................... 1-50

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-52

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-62

SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-70

SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-72

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-73

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Front seats

WARNING

.Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

.Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers and cargo are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

.After adjusting the seat, push it

slightly to make sure it is se-

curely locked. If the seat is not

securely locked, it may move or

the seatbelt may not operate

properly.

.Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking and cause an

accident.

.Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

.The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times. The

SRS airbag deploys with consider-

able speed and force and can injure

or even kill children, especially if

they are not restrained or impro-

perly restrained. Because children

are lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. For that rea-

son, we strongly recommend that

ALL children (including those in

child seats and those that have

outgrown child restraint devices)

sit in the REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt,

1-2

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Se-

cure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing

child seat) in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems”F1-30.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may lead to

defective operation of the following

systems and could result in serious

injury.

.Occupant detection system

.SRS side airbag

.Seat heater (if equipped)

.Power seat (if equipped)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

–CONTINUED –

1-3

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

&Manual seat

!Forward and backward adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and try to move the seat back and

forth to make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

!Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

the lever is pulled. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

!Seat height adjustment (driver’s

seat)

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat

rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and

down.

1-4

&Power seat (driver’s seat —if

equipped)

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat height.

2) Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

3) Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback,

move the control switch.

5) Lumbar support control switch

To increase lower back support, push the

front side of the switch. To decrease

lower back support, push the rear side of

the switch.

!Memory function (driver’s seat —if

equipped)

WARNING

.Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

.Before adjusting the seat, make

sure that cargo or the hands and

feet of rear seat passengers are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

.Never retrieve the seat position

while driving to avoid loss of

vehicle control and personal in-

jury.

.Perform the seat position retrie-

val before driving. Be sure to

confirm that the select lever is

in the “P”position, and the

parking brake is applied, when

adjusting the seat position. Do

not drive until the retrieval of the

seat position is complete.

.When retrieving a registered seat

position, make sure the hands,

feet and possessions of rear seat

passengers are clear of the seat

adjusting mechanism.

.When any unusual conditions or

malfunctions occur during the

retrieval of the seat position, stop

the retrieval of the seat position

by performing any of the follow-

ing procedures.

–Operate any of the power seat

switches

–Press the “SET”button

–Press button “1”or “2”

Some of your desired seat positions can

be registered. Register the seat position

with button “1”or “2”or each of the access

keys and retrieve the seat position.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

–CONTINUED –

1-5

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

The following seat positions can be

registered.

.Forward/backward position of the seat

.Angle of seatback

.Angle of seat cushion

.Height of seat

!Registration of seat position with

button “1”or “2”

1. Adjust the seat position under the

following conditions.

.The parking brake is applied.

.The select lever is in the “P”posi-

tion.

2. While pressing the “SET”button, press

and hold the desired button “1”or “2”.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position

is registered.

!Registration of seat position with

each access key

1. Adjust the seat position under the

following conditions.

.The parking brake is applied.

.The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF”position.

.The select lever is in the “P”posi-

tion.

2. While holding the access key fob and

pressing the “SET”button, press the “”

button of the access key fob.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position

is registered.

!Retrieval of seat position regis-

tered with button “1”or “2”

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button

to retrieve your registered seat

position. If the seat position is not

optimum for you, it may adversely

affect your driving and may reduce

the effectiveness of the seatbelt.

That could result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. While the select lever is in the “P”

position and the parking brake is applied,

press button “1”or “2”.

1-6

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the

registered position. When the seat moves

to the registered position, a chirp will

sound.

NOTE

.If a new position is registered for the

same button, the previously registered

seat position is deleted.

.If the vehicle battery is removed, the

registered seat position is not deleted.

.When the button “1”or “2”is

pressed within 45 seconds after the

driver’s door is opened, the registered

seat position can be retrieved even if

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”or

“OFF”position.

!Retrieval of the seat position

registered with access key

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing

the “”button or gripping the door handle.

3. Open the driver’s door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the

registered position. When the seat moves

to the registered position, a chirp will

sound.

NOTE

.If the registered seat position cannot

be retrieved after performing the pre-

vious procedures, try the following

procedures.

(1) Press the “SET”button on the

driver’s door.

(2) Press the “”button on the

access key fob or touch the door

lock sensor to lock the doors.

(3) Perform the prior procedures

again.

.If the keyless access function is

disabled, the seat position cannot be

retrieved by gripping the driver’s door

handle. However, the seat position can

still be retrieved by pressing the “”

button on the access key fob. For

information about how to enable/dis-

able the keyless access function, refer

to “Disabling keyless access function”

F2-17.

.If a new position is registered for the

same access key fob, the previously

registered seat position is deleted.

!Clearing the registered seat

position with access key

1. Close the driver’s door.

2. While holding the access key fob and

pressing the “SET”button, press the “”

button on the access key fob.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat

position will be cleared.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

–CONTINUED –

1-7

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

&Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

.Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints the opposite

way round. Doing so will prevent

the head restraints from func-

tioning as intended. Therefore,

when you remove the head re-

straints, you must reinstall all

head restraints correctly to pro-

tect vehicle occupants.

.All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

.The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat

head restraints are designed to

be installed into the rear seats

only. Do not attempt to install the

front seat head restraints into the

rear seats, or the rear seat head

restraints into the front seats.

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat are equipped with head re-

straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-

ble in the following ways.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of the

front seat head restraints only. When

installing the front seat head restraints,

make sure that the angle of the head

restraints can be adjusted.

!Head restraint height adjustment

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

1-8

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

!Head restraint angle adjustment

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

Seat heater (if equipped)

CAUTION

.People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

.Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

more from the completely closed posi-

tion.

.Before closing the rear gate in step

4, it is possible to register the height

many times through step 3. Therefore,

the registered height can easily be fine-

tuned.

Retrieval of the rear gate height:

To open the rear gate and stop it at the

registered height, perform the following

procedure.

1. Press the memory switch to select the

ON status.

2. Press and hold any of the power rear

gate switches.

Even if any of the power rear gate

switches are pressed and held while the

memory switch is in the OFF status, you

can stop it at the registered height by

pressing the memory switch to select the

ON status before the rear gate reaches

the registered height.

NOTE

.The rear gate will open to the

position that is stored in the memory

function even if the rear gate is opened

by the reverse function.

.If the rear gate is opened manually

while the memory function is activated,

you cannot close it by pressing the

power rear gate button on the rear gate.

To close it, press the other power rear

gate button or close it manually.

!Reverse function

WARNING

.Do not let parts of your body be

caught intentionally to operate

the reverse function. If the re-

verse function does not operate

for some reason, this may lead to

serious injury or accidents.

.The reverse function may not

operate if foreign objects are

caught in the rear gate just

before it closes completely. Be

careful not to catch your fingers

and other body parts.

.The reverse function may not

operate depending on the object

shape and the manner in which it

was caught. Be careful not to

catch your fingers and other

body parts.

2-44

CAUTION

.If the reverse function is operated

3 times consecutively, automatic

opening and closing of the power

rear gate function will be can-

celed and the rear gate can be

opened and closed normally.

Whether the rear gate opens or

closes depends on the rear gate

height when automatic operation

is ceased. Be careful that the rear

gate does not hit anyone’s head

or face, etc. and that fingers and

baggage, etc. are not caught in it.

.Take care not to damage the

touch sensors. Otherwise, the

reverse function may cease to

operate.

If, while opening or closing using power

rear gate, the rear gate catches persons

or baggage or hits an obstacle, an

electronic chirp will sound 3 times and

the rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear

gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear

gate will automatically open.

1) Touch sensor

Touch sensors are attached on the left

and right edges of the rear gate. If the

touch sensors detect fingers, baggage,

etc. while closing by the power rear gate

function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3

times and the rear gate will open auto-

matically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using the

reverse function, it will be opened fully

or to the height registered in the

memory function.

!Rear gate drop prevention function

If, while fully opened via the power rear

gate function, the rear gate is lowered by

the weight of snow and such, an electronic

chirp will sound and the rear gate will

close automatically.

NOTE

.If there is snow on the rear gate,

only use the power rear gate function

after removing the snow.

.If you close the rear gate manually

just after the rear gate is fully opened

using the power rear gate function, the

rear gate drop prevention function will

operate to close the rear gate automa-

tically. In this case, this is not a

malfunction.

Keys and doors/Rear gate 2-45

Keys and doors/Moonroof

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone’shands,arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur.

.The vehicle stops suddenly.

.The vehicle turns sharply.

.The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

.Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside

objects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

.Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

.Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

.Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

.Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

.Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

.Do not touch the moving parts of

the moonroof while the moonroof

is operating.

.If the moonroof does not close,

we recommend that you have the

system checked by a SUBARU

dealer.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

&Moonroof switch

1) OPEN/CLOSE switch

2) Open

3) Close

To open the moonroof:

Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”

switch. The sun shade will also be opened

together with the moonroof. The moonroof

will stop at a position approximately 8 in

(20 cm) away from the fully opened

position. Slide the switch rearward again

to open the moonroof completely.

To close the moonroof:

Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”

switch.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening or closing it,

momentarily push the switch to the

2-46

“OPEN”side or “CLOSE”side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to

opening the moonroof to prevent drops

of water from falling into the passenger

compartment.

NOTE

Driving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to be

generated at high speeds. If this oc-

curs, use the moonroof at the initial

stop position of 8 in (20 cm) away from

the fully opened position.

&Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

&Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-47

————————————————————————————————————————

Ignition switch (models without push-

button start system)......................................... 3-4

LOCK.................................................................. 3-4

ACC.................................................................... 3-5

ON...................................................................... 3-5

START ................................................................ 3-5

Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5

Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-6

Push-button ignition switch (models with

push-button start system) ............................... 3-6

Safety precautions .............................................. 3-6

Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-6

Switching power status ....................................... 3-7

When access key fob does not operate

properly ............................................................ 3-8

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-8

Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-9

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-9

Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle

movement upon turning on the ignition

switch............................................................... 3-9

Speedometer...................................................... 3-10

Odometer........................................................... 3-10

Double trip meter ............................................... 3-10

Tachometer ........................................................ 3-11

Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-12

ECO gauge (if equipped) .................................... 3-12

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................ 3-16

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light .................................................. 3-16

Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant

temperature high warning light......................... 3-17

Charge warning light.......................................... 3-18

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-18

Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-18

Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-19

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-19

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.

models) ........................................................... 3-19

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-21

Brake system warning light................................ 3-21

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-22

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF

indicator light .................................................. 3-23

Door open warning light .................................... 3-23

All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)........ 3-23

Power steering warning light.............................. 3-23

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-24

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-25

Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless

access with push-button start system (if

equipped) ........................................................ 3-26

Security indicator light....................................... 3-30

SI-DRIVE indicator light (if equipped).................. 3-31

Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT

models) ........................................................... 3-31

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-32

Instruments and controls

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-32

High beam assist indicator light (if equipped)...... 3-32

Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-32

Cruise control set indicator light (if

equipped)......................................................... 3-32

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if

equipped)......................................................... 3-32

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator

light (if equipped) ............................................. 3-33

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-33

Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-33

X-mode indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-33

Hill descent control indicator light (if

equipped)......................................................... 3-33

Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if

equipped)......................................................... 3-33

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 3-33

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 3-34

RAB warning light (if equipped) .......................... 3-34

RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped).................. 3-34

Information display (Mexico-spec. models)...... 3-34

Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-35

Driving information display................................. 3-35

Clock ................................................................. 3-39

Multi information display (models with type

B combination meter) ..................................... 3-39

Basic operation.................................................. 3-40

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen ............... 3-40

Warning screen .................................................. 3-41

Basic screens .................................................... 3-41

Menu screens .................................................... 3-42

Multi function display (if equipped).................. 3-44

Basic operation ................................................. 3-45

Welcome screen ................................................ 3-45

Ending screen ................................................... 3-46

Self-check screen .............................................. 3-47

Interruption screen ............................................ 3-48

Basic screens.................................................... 3-49

Selection screen ................................................ 3-56

Date and time settings ....................................... 3-59

Image quality and volume settings ..................... 3-66

Screen settings.................................................. 3-68

Maintenance settings ......................................... 3-76

Driving history registration................................. 3-79

Car settings....................................................... 3-80

Initialize............................................................. 3-90

Light control switch........................................... 3-93

Headlights ......................................................... 3-93

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-95

Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-98

Daytime running light system............................. 3-98

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (if

equipped) ........................................................ 3-99

SRH OFF switch ................................................ 3-99

Turn signal lever .............................................. 3-100

One-touch lane changer................................... 3-101

Illumination brightness control....................... 3-101

Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............. 3-102

Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with

LED headlights) ............................................. 3-102

Instruments and controls

Fog light switch (if equipped) ......................... 3-102

Steering responsive fog lights system (if

equipped)....................................................... 3-103

Wiper and washer ............................................ 3-104

Windshield wiper and washer switches ............. 3-105

Rear window wiper and washer switch.............. 3-106

Mirrors............................................................... 3-107

Inside mirror .................................................... 3-107

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)...... 3-108

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink

(if equipped) .................................................. 3-109

Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-116

Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-116

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-118

Horn.................................................................. 3-119

Heated Steering Wheel system (if

equipped) ...................................................... 3-119

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

Ignition switch (models with-

out push-button start sys-

tem)

WARNING

.Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”position while the

vehicle is being driven or towed

because that will lock the steer-

ing wheel, preventing steering

control. And when the engine is

turned off, it takes a much great-

er effort than usual to steer.

.Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child or

others. Children could operate

the power windows, the moon-

roof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON”posi-

tion to the “ACC”or “LOCK”posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a

keyholder or to a large bunch of

other keys, centrifugal force may act

on it as the vehicle moves, resulting

in unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

.Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK”position when the engine is

not running.

.Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON”or “ACC”position can cause the

battery to go dead.

.If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK”position to the “ACC”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

&LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the

steering wheel slightly to the right and left

as you turn the key.

3-4

The key can be turned from the “ACC”to

“LOCK”position only when the select

lever is in the “P”position (CVT models)

and the key is pushed in while turning it

(all models).

&ACC

In this position the electrical accessories

(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

&ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

&START

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON”position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START”position while the engine

is running.

If your registered key fails to start the

engine, pull out the key once (the security

indicator light will blink), and then insert

the key in the ignition switch and turn it to

the “START”position and again try to start

the engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

.The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

.The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.

.The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

&Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”or “ACC”position.

The chime stops under the following

conditions.

.when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position

.when the key is removed from the

ignition switch

.when the driver’s door is closed

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

–CONTINUED –

3-5

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

&Ignition switch light (if

equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when the driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several

tens of seconds and then gradually turns

off under the following conditions.

.when the driver’s door is closed

.when the doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter

The light turns off immediately under the

following conditions.

.when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position

.when all doors and the rear gate are

locked using the remote keyless entry

transmitter

Push-button ignition switch

(models with push-button

start system)

&Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions”F2-10.

&Operating range for push-

button start system

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

NOTE

.If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the an-

tennas inside the vehicle, the push-

button ignition switch and the engine

start cannot be operated.

.Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible to

switch the power or to start the engine.

.Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places. It may become

impossible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start.

–On the instrument panel

–On the floor

–Inside the glove box

–Inside the door trim pocket

–On the rear seat

–At the corner of the cargo area

.When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the engine,

if the access key fob battery is dis-

charged, perform the procedure de-

scribed in “Access key fob –if access

key fob does not operate properly”F9-

17. In such a case, replace the battery

immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-

tery of access key fob”F11-45.

3-6

&Switching power status

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the

push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal. Every

time the button is pressed, the power is

switched in the sequence of “OFF”,

“ACC”,“ON”and “OFF”. When the engine

is stopped and the push-button ignition

switch is in “ACC”or “ON”, the operation

indicator on the push-button ignition

switch illuminates in orange.

Power

status Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped) All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

.When the push-button ignition

switch is left in “ON”or “ACC”

for a long time, it may result in

vehicle battery discharge.

.Do not spill drinks or other

liquids on the push-button igni-

tion switch. It may cause a mal-

function.

.Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand soiled

with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

.If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

.If the push-button ignition switch

does not illuminate even when

the instrument panel illumination

is turned on, have the vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

.If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

.When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all the

way.

.If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

.If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in green

when the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

–CONTINUED –

3-7

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher

!Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

When the push-button ignition switch is

left in the “ACC”or “ON”position for

approximately 1 hour, the push-button

ignition switch will be automatically

switched to “OFF”to prevent the battery

from going dead. This function is activated

when the select lever is in the “P”position.

&When access key fob does

not operate properly

Refer to “Access key fob –if access key

fob does not operate properly”F9-17.

Hazard warning flasher

1) Models with multi function display

2) Models without multi function display

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works regard-

less of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. All the turn signal lights

and the turn signal indicator lights will

flash. To turn off the flasher, push the

button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

3-8

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the

combination meter use liquid-crystal

displays. You will find their indications

hard to see if you wear polarized

glasses.

&Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position, various parts of the combi-

nation meter will illuminate in the following

sequence.

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal

display illuminate.

2. Meter and gauge indications each

show MAX position.

3. Meter and gauge indications each

show MIN position.

4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

&Canceling the function for

meter/gauge needle move-

ment upon turning on the

ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that takes place when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. To change the setting, perform

the following procedure.

!Type A combination meter

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”or “ACC”position.

1) Trip knob

2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or

“”on the trip meter display.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

trip knob.

*: They cannot be displayed when the

ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

To change the current setting, press the

trip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated

: Deactivated

NOTE

.Your vehicle’s initial movement

setting of the meter/gauge needles

has been set for activation “”at

the time of shipment from the factory.

.It is not possible to change the initial

movement setting of the meter/gauge

needles when the ignition switch is in

the “ON”position. Change the setting

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF”or “ACC”position.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

–CONTINUED –

3-9

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

!Type B combination meter

Perform the procedures described in

“Gauge Initial Movement”F3-43.

&Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

&Odometer

Odometer (type A)

Odometer (type B)

1) Trip knob

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”or “ACC”

position, the odometer/trip meter will light

up. If you do not press the trip knob within

10 seconds of illumination of the od-

ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter

will turn off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

&Double trip meter

Double trip meter (type A)

Double trip meter (type B)

1) Trip knob

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

3-10

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”or “ACC”

position, the odometer/trip meter will light

up. It is possible to switch between the A

trip meter and B trip meter indications

while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If

you do not press the trip knob within 10

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn

off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

trip knob.

*: They cannot be displayed when the

ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob

and keep the knob pressed for more than

2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

&Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine when the

pointer of the tachometer is in the

red zone. In this range, fuel injection

will be cut by the engine control

module to protect the engine from

overrevving. The engine will resume

running normally after the engine

speed is reduced below the red

zone.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

–CONTINUED –

3-11

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

&Fuel gauge

Fuel gauge (type A)

Fuel gauge (type B)

1) Trip knob

The fuel gauge is displayed when the

ignition is in the “ON”position, and it

shows the approximate amount of fuel

remaining in the tank.

The gauge indication may change slightly

during braking, turning or acceleration due

to fuel level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”or “ACC”

position, the fuel gauge will light up and

indicate the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank. If, while the fuel gauge is

indicating the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob

for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the

driver’s door, the fuel gauge indication will

turn off.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

&ECO gauge (if equipped)

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the current rate of fuel consump-

tion and the average rate of fuel consump-

tion since the trip meter was last reset.

If the needle of the gauge moves towards

the right side, this indicates better fuel

efficiency.

NOTE

.The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication of fuel effi-

ciency.

.After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not

shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).

Before that time, the ECO gauge does

not operate.

3-12

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate when the ignition switch is

initially turned to the “ON”position. This

permits checking the operation of the

bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON”position. For

the system check, several of the following

lights illuminate and then turn off after

several seconds or after the engine has

started.

: Seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the driver fastens the

seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light

: Coolant temperature low indicator

light/Coolant temperature high warn-

ing light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Engine low oil level warning light*

: Windshield washer fluid warning light*

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(CVT models)

: Low tire pressure warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start

assist OFF indicator light

: Door open warning light

: AWD warning light (CVT models)

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light

: Cruise control indicator light

(if equipped)

: Cruise control set indicator light

(if equipped)

: Headlight indicator light (if equipped)

: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light (if equipped)

: Steering Responsive Headlight warn-

ing light/Steering Responsive Head-

light OFF indicator light (if equipped)*

: High beam assist indicator light (if

equipped)

: Access key warning light

(if equipped)

: X-mode indicator light (if equipped)

: Hill descent control indicator light (if

equipped)*

*: Applies to models with type A combina-

tion meter.

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-13

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

&Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following

illustration and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light (type A)

Driver’s warning light (type B)

Front passenger’s warning light

!Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

.If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

–At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

–At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

.It is possible to cancel the warning

3-14

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device

to fail.

.Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

.Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

.Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

.Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Front seats”F1-2.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

.Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant, although we

strongly recommend that all children sit

in the rear seat properly restrained.

.Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

.Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

&SRS airbag system

warning light

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

.Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

.No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON”position

.Continuous illumination of the

warning light

.Illumination of the warning light

while driving

For more details about the SRS airbag

system warning light, refer to “SRS airbag

system monitors”F1-70.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-15

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

&Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indica-

tors

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located next to the

clock in the center portion of the dash-

board.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain illuminated or off simulta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is malfunctioning.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately for an inspection.

&CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is at least one problem or

potential problem somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

!If the light illuminates steadily

If the light illuminates steadily while driving

or does not turn off after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illuminating

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator light

3-16

turn off immediately. It may take several

driving trips. If the light does not turn off,

take your vehicle to your authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

!If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

.Reduce vehicle speed.

.Avoid hard acceleration.

.Avoid steep uphill grades.

.Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

.If towing a trailer, stop doing so as soon

as possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

&Coolant temperature

low indicator light/Cool-

ant temperature high

warning light

CAUTION

.After turning the ignition switch

to the “ON”position, if this

indicator light/warning light be-

haves in any of the following

ways, the electrical system may

be malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for

an inspection.

–It remains blinking in RED.

–It remains illuminated in RED

for more than 2 seconds.

–It remains blinking in RED and

BLUE alternately.

.While driving, if this indicator

light/warning light behaves in

any of the following ways, take

the specified appropriate mea-

sure listed below.

–Blinking or illuminated in

RED:

Safely stop the vehicle as

soon as possible, and refer

to the emergency steps to

take in the case of engine

overheating. After that, have

the system checked by your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer

to “Engine overheating”F9-

12.

–Blinking in RED and BLUE

alternately:

The electrical system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

This coolant temperature low indicator

light/coolant temperature high warning

light has the following three functions.

.Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-

cient warming up of the engine

.Blinking in RED indicates that the

engine is close to overheating

.Illumination in RED indicates overheat-

ing condition of the engine

For a system check, this indicator light/

warning light illuminates in RED for

approximately 2 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON”position.

After that, this indicator light/warning light

changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-

tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light

turns off when the engine is warmed up

sufficiently.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-17

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

If the engine coolant temperature in-

creases over the specified range, the

indicator light/warning light blinks in

RED. At this time, the engine is close to

overheating.

If the engine coolant temperature in-

creases further, the indicator light/warning

light illuminates in RED continuously. At

this time, the engine may be overheating.

When the indicator light/warning light

blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely

stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and

refer to the emergency steps to take in the

case of engine overheating. Refer to

“Engine overheating”F9-12. After that,

have the system checked by your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

Also, if the indicator light/warning light

often blinks in RED, the electrical system

may be malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

If the engine is restarted after a certain

driving condition, this indicator light/

warning light may illuminate in RED.

However, this is not a malfunction if the

indicator light/warning light turns off

after a short time.

&Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

&Oil pressure warning

light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains

illuminated, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

For details about checking the engine oil

level or adding the engine oil, refer to

“Engine oil”F11-10.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light illumi-

nated. This may cause serious en-

gine damage.

&Engine low oil level

warning light

This light illuminates when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the engine low oil level warning light

illuminates while driving, park the vehicle

in a safe and level location, and then

check the engine oil level. When the

engine oil level is not within the normal

range, refill with engine oil. Refer to

“Engine oil”F11-10.

If the warning light does not turn off after

refilling the engine oil, or the warning light

illuminates even though the engine oil

level is within the normal range, have the

vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

.After replacing or adding the engine

oil, if the engine oil level is within the

normal range when restarting the en-

gine on a level surface, the warning

light will turn off.

3-18

.The warning light may illuminate

temporarily in the following conditions

because a low oil level may be detected

as a result of significant oil movement

in the engine.

–when the vehicle is considerably

inclined on an uphill or steep slope

–when the vehicle has continu-

ously accelerated and decelerated

–when the vehicle is continuously

turned

–when the vehicle is driven on a

road that alternates continuously

between uphill and downhill

&Windshield washer

fluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).

&AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

!Transmission control system warn-

ing

If the “AT OIL TEMP”warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may

indicate that the transmission control

system is not working properly. Contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer for service

immediately.

&Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.-spec.

models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will turn off.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-19

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

as the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of re-

placement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned ON or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 25 mph (40

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should turn

off a few minutes later. Therefore, be

sure to install the specified size for

the front and rear tires.

3-20

&ABS warning light

CAUTION

.If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

–The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

–The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON”position,

but it does not turn off even

when the vehicle speed ex-

ceeds approximately 25 mph

(40 km/h).

–The warning light illuminates

during driving.

.When the warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down. However, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light illuminates to-

gether with the brake system warning light

if the EBD system malfunctions. For

further details of the EBD system mal-

function warning, refer to “Electronic

Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

warning”F3-22.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

.The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position and turns off approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the engine has

started.

.The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

.The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

but it turns off when the vehicle speed

reaches approximately 25 mph (40

km/h).

.The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.

&Brake system

warning light

The light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON”position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

.Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

.If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

The brake system warning light has the

following functions.

!Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN”level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON”position and with the

parking brake fully released.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-21

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe

location and check the brake fluid level.

If the fluid level is below the “MIN”mark in

the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

!Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also

illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the

EBD system. In that event, it illuminates

together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat location.

2. Shut down the engine, apply the

parking brake and then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. Even if

both warning lights turn off, the EBD

system may be malfunctioning. Drive

carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer

and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after the engine

has been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN”mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN”mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

!Vacuum pump system warning

(turbo models)

This light illuminates when a malfunction

is detected in the vacuum pump system.

NOTE

The vacuum pump system assists the

boost pressure when driving at high

altitudes while the engine is cold.

&Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi-

mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal).

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON”position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

3-22

&Hill start assist warning

light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light

!Hill start assist warning light

While the engine is running, if there are

any malfunctions in the Hill start assist

system, the warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist warning

light illuminates, have the vehicle

inspected at an authorized SUBARU

dealer.

!Hill start assist OFF indicator light

While the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continuously to

inform the driver that the Hill start assist

system is not operational.

&Door open warning

light

The warning light illuminates if any door or

the rear gate is not fully closed. This

function is effective even if the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”or “ACC”

position, or the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

&All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (CVT models)

CAUTION

Continuing to drive with the AWD

warning light flashing can damage

the powertrain. If the AWD warning

light starts to flash, promptly park in

a safe location and check whether

the tires have differing diameters or

excessively low inflation pressure.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of

the temporary spare tire should there-

fore be restricted to the minimum time

necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as

soon as possible.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure exces-

sively low in any of its tires.

&Power steering warning

light

This warning light illuminates when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off after the engine

has started. This indicates that the warn-

ing system is working properly.

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-23

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

.The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

.The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period

of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too fre-

quently, that may result in a malfunc-

tion of the power steering control

system.

&Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control op-

eration indicator light

!Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

also becomes inoperative, causing

the warning light to illuminate.

Although both the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and ABS are inop-

erative in this case, the ordinary

functions of the brake system are

still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but drive

carefully and have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

.If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illumi-

nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) remains fully opera-

tional.

.The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

.The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position.

.The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

.The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position and turns off approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the engine has

started.

3-24

.The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

.The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently being

driven.

.The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

.The warning light illuminates when

the engine has stalled and continues to

illuminate after the engine has been

restarted. However, it will turn off once

the vehicle starts moving.

!Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and

during activation of the traction control

function.

NOTE

.The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the engine

has been started, especially in cold

weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

.The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

.The light does not turn off even after

the lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

&Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

.The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

.The light does not turn off even once

several seconds have elapsed after the

ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON”position.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-25

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

&Warning chimes and warning

light of the keyless access

with push-button start sys-

tem (if equipped)

Access key warning light (type A)

Access key warning light (type B)

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning light on

the combination meter in order to minimize

improper operations and help protect your

vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning light flashes, take the appro-

priate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indi-

cator on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

.When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

.When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

.Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside the

vehicle, the access key warning for

engine start may be provided depend-

ing on the status of the access key fob

and the environmental conditions.

.When the access key fob is taken

out of the vehicle through an open

window, the access key takeout warn-

ing or passenger access key takeout

warning will not be provided.

!List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing light does not illuminate, take

the appropriate action.

3-26

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Access key

warning light on

meter

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding,

ding ...

(intermittent)

—— —

The driver’s door is opened while

the push-button ignition switch is

“ACC”and the select lever is in the

“P”position.

Switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”, or close the

driver’s door.

*When exiting the vehicle, be sure

to switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch is

switched to “OFF”while the driver’s

door is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding Short beep

(2 seconds) ——

Lockout warning:

An attempt is made to lock all doors

while the access key fob is left

inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from

the vehicle, and lock the doors.

*The doors cannot be locked while

the access key fob is inside the

vehicle.

*A chirp sound will be heard, and all

doors will be unlocked.

—Short beep

(2 seconds) ——

Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor is touched

while the push-button ignition

switch is “OFF”and the access key

fob is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from

the vehicle, and lock the doors.

*If the access key fob is inside the

vehicle, the doors cannot be

locked.

—Beep, beep ...

(5 beeps) ——

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched

while the push-button ignition

switch is in the “OFF”position and

one of the doors including the rear

gate is opened.

Close the doors securely and lock

them.

*If one of the doors including the

rear gate is opened, the doors

cannot be locked.

Ding Long beep (60

seconds max.) ——

Power warning:

The door lock sensor is touched

while carrying the access key fob

and the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF”

and the select lever is in the “P”

position.

Return the access key fob inside

the vehicle, or switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF”.

*If the push-button ignition switch is

not switched to “OFF”, the doors

cannot be locked.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-27

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Access key

warning light on

meter

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds) —

(Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

—

Access key warning:

The vehicle is being driven while

the access key fob is not inside the

vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive

the vehicle.

Ding —

(Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

—

Access key warning for engine

start:

The push-button ignition switch is

pressed while the access key fob is

not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

Ding Beep, beep,

beep (3 beeps) (Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the

access key fob and closes the

driver’s door while the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF”and the select lever is in

the “P”position.

Switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”, and get out of the

vehicle.

Ding Beep, beep,

beep (3 beeps) (Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

—

Passenger access key takeout

warning:

A fellow passenger exits the vehi-

cle with the access key fob and

closes a door other than the dri-

ver’s door while the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside

the vehicle, or switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous) (Flashes 1 sec.

intermittent)

—

Access key takeout without “P”

position warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the

access key fob and closes the

driver’s door while the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF”and the select lever is in

a position other than the “P”posi-

tion.

Shift the select lever to the “P”

position, switch the push-button

ignition switch to “OFF”and exit the

vehicle.

3-28

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Access key

warning light on

meter

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Long beep

(continuous) —— —

Select lever position warning:

The engine is turned off by press-

ing the push-button ignition switch

and the select lever is in a position

other than the “P”position.

Start the engine, shift the select

lever to the “P”position, switch the

push-button ignition switch to “OFF”

and exit the vehicle.

Long beep

(continuous) —— —

Select lever position warning:

The driver’s door is opened while

the push-button ignition switch is in

a position other than “OFF”and the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P”position.

Shift the select lever to the “P”

position, switch the push-button

ignition switch to “OFF”and exit the

vehicle.

Ding —— —

The battery of the access key fob is

low.

Replace the battery of the access

key fob.

Ding ——

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure is

performed, but the steering is still

locked.

While turning the steering wheel

right and left lightly, depress the

brake pedal and press the push-

button ignition switch.

Ding ——Flashes in orange System malfunction warning:

A malfunction is detected in the

power system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately and have the vehicle in-

spected.

NOTE

An electronic chirp will sound while the select lever is in the “R”position. In this case, the select lever position warning chime

will not sound.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-29

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

&Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

!Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm system”F2-

25.

!Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

.Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF”position.

.Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the following

conditions are met.

–The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON”or “ACC”position.

–The access key fob is outside the

vehicle.

–The engine is not running.

In the event that the push-button ignition

switch is pressed to turn it on or to start

the engine carrying an unauthorized key

(for example, the key is unregistered or

the ID code does not match), the power is

not switched to “ON”and the security

indicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

.Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC”or “LOCK”position.

.Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used to start the engine, the security

indicator light illuminates. For details

about the immobilizer system, refer to

“Immobilizer”F2-3.

NOTE

.The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer system

is deactivated, and it does not indicate

a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

–while the engine is running

–the push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON”or

“ACC”position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or closed

Models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

–while the engine is running

–for approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON”position to the

“ACC”or “LOCK”position

–when the ignition switch is in the

“ON”position

.Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as if the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

3-30

&SI-DRIVE indicator light (if

equipped)

SI-DRIVE indicator light (type A)

1) Sport (S) mode

2) Intelligent (I) mode

3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

SI-DRIVE indicator light (type B)

1) Sport (S) mode

2) Intelligent (I) mode

3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-

DRIVE”F7-32.

&Select lever/gear position in-

dicator (CVT models)

Select lever/gear position indicator (type

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-31

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Select lever/gear position indicator (type

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the

select lever.

For models with manual mode, when the

manual mode is selected, the gear posi-

tion indicator (which shows the current

gear selection) and the upshift/downshift

indicator light up. Refer to “Continuously

variable transmission”F7-25.

For models with SI-DRIVE, the upshift/

downshift indicators are switched off while

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.

&Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing bulbs”F11-39.

&High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

the headlight flasher is operated.

&High beam assist indi-

cator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the high beam

assist function is activated. For details

about the high beam assist function, refer

to “High beam assist function”F3-95.

&Cruise control indicator

light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the cruise

control main button is pressed to activate

the cruise control function. For details,

refer to “To set cruise control”F7-54.

If this light blinks, do not use the cruise

control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates, the cruise control indicator

light flashes at the same time. At

this time, avoid driving at high

speed and have your vehicle in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

&Cruise control set in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

This light illuminates when vehicle speed

has been set to use the cruise control

function. Refer to “To set cruise control”

F7-54.

&Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

3-32

If this light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off approximately 3 seconds after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, have your vehicle inspected at

your SUBARU dealer.

&Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light/

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight OFF switch is

pressed to deactivate the Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes

when a malfunction occurs in the Steering

Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering

Responsive Headlight (SRH)”F3-99.

&Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

&Headlight indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

.when the light switch is turned to the

“”or “ ” position

.when the light control switch is in the

“AUTO”position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically

&X-mode indicator light

(if equipped)

This light illuminates while the X-mode is

activated. It will turn off when the X-mode

is deactivated. Refer to “To activate/

deactivate the X-mode”F7-44.

&Hill descent control in-

dicator light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates while the hill

descent control function is in standby. It

will flash while the hill descent control

function is operating. It will turn off when

the hill descent control function is not

available. Refer to “Hill descent control

function”F7-45.

&Steering responsive

fog lights warning indi-

cator/Steering respon-

sive fog lights OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

NOTE

For details about the steering respon-

sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-

ing responsive fog lights system”F3-

103.

!Steering responsive fog lights

warning indicator

This indicator starts blinking when the

steering responsive fog lights system

malfunctions. When this indicator is blink-

ing while the system is activated, contact

your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

!Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

&BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the

BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

–CONTINUED –

3-33

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexico–spec. models)

For models with type A combination

meter, the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

will be shown on the combination meter.

For models with type B combination

meter, the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

will be shown on the multi information

display of the combination meter.

When this indicator appears, have your

vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

&BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor (if equipped)

The indicator appears when the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate

the BSD/RCTA.

For models with type A combination

meter, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will

be shown on the combination meter. For

models with type B combination meter, the

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown

on the multi information display of the

combination meter.

For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”F7-59.

&RAB warning light (if

equipped)

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking System malfunctions.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System”F7-67.

&RAB OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking System is turned

OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic

Braking System is suspended temporarily.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System”F7-67.

Information display (Mexico-

spec. models)

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a color

multi function display, refer to “Multi

function display”F3-44.

1) Outside temperature indicator

2) Driving information display

3) Clock

With the ignition switch in the “ACC”

position, the clock appears on the display.

With the ignition switch in the “ON”

position, the outside temperature indica-

tor, driving information display and clock

all appear on the display.

3-34

&Outside temperature indica-

tor

This indicator displays the outside tem-

perature between −408F(−408C) and

1228F (508C).

NOTE

The indicator may give an inaccurate

reading under any of the following

conditions:

.When the sensor is exposed to

direct sun light.

.When idling, when running at low

speeds in a traffic jam, or when the

engine is restarted immediately after a

shut-down.

.When the actual outside tempera-

ture falls outside the specified indicator

range.

!Road surface freeze warning indi-

cation

When the outside temperature drops to

378F(38C) or lower, the temperature

indication flashes to show that the road

surface may be frozen.

If the outside temperature drops to 378F

(38C) or lower while the display is giving

an indication other than the outside

temperature, the display switches to the

outside temperature indication and flashes

for 5 seconds before returning to its

original indication.

If the display is already indicating an

outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position, the indication does not

flash.

NOTE

The outside temperature indication

may differ from the actual outside

temperature. The road surface freeze

warning indication should be treated

only as a guide. Be sure to check the

condition of the road surface before

driving.

&Driving information display

For type A combination meter

1) Information display selection knob

With the ignition switch in the “ON”

position, each successive press of the

information display selection knob

switches the display in the following

sequence.

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexico–spec. models)

–CONTINUED –

3-35

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexico–spec. models)

!Driving range on remaining fuel

The driving range indicates the distance

that can be driven taking into account the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

the average rate of fuel consumption.

When the low fuel warning light illumi-

nates, the driving range display flashes for

5 seconds. (The display first switches to

the driving range value if a different value

was previously displayed.)

If the driving range is shown as “ ”,

there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the

tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-

ately.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

!Average fuel consumption

This display shows the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

For type A combination meter

1) Trip knob

3-36

Pressing the trip knob toggles the display

between the average fuel consumption

corresponding to the A trip meter display

and the average fuel consumption corre-

sponding to the B trip meter display.

When either of the trip meter displays is

reset, the corresponding average fuel

consumption value is also reset.

NOTE

.The indicated values vary in accor-

dance with changes in the vehicle’s

running conditions. Also, the indicated

values may differ slightly from the

actual values and should thus be

treated only as a guide.

.When either trip meter display is

reset, the average fuel consumption

corresponding to that trip meter dis-

play is not shown until the vehicle has

subsequently covered a distance of 1

mile (or 1 km).

!Current fuel consumption

This indication shows the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

!Journey time

The journey time shows the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch was

turned to the “ON”position.

The journey time indication flashes each

time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexico–spec. models)

–CONTINUED –

3-37

Instruments and controls/Information display (Mexico–spec. models)

display is giving a reading other than the

journey time, the display switches to the

journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and

returns to its original reading each time a

complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE

The journey time is reset when the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”position. It is also reset if the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”or “ACC”position prior to

restarting of the engine.

!Average vehicle speed

This display shows the average vehicle

speed since the trip meter was last reset.

For type A combination meter

1) Trip knob

Pressing the trip knob toggles the display

between the average vehicle speed cor-

responding to the A trip meter display and

the average vehicle speed corresponding

to the B trip meter display.

When either of the trip meter displays is

reset, the corresponding average vehicle

speed value is also reset.

NOTE

When either trip meter display is reset,

the average vehicle speed correspond-

ing to that trip meter display is not

shown until the vehicle has subse-

quently covered a distance of 1 mile

(or 1 km).

!X-mode indicator (if

equipped)

This indicator will be shown while the X-

mode is activated. It will turn off when the

X-mode is deactivated.

!Turn off display of driving informa-

tion display

The driving information display can be

turned off.

To turn off the display, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position and

press the “+”button adjacent to the clock

display for approximately 5 seconds.

Then, the driving information display and

the clock display will blink for 3 seconds to

notify you that the driving information

display has been turned off.

To restore the driving information display,

once again press the “+”button for

approximately 5 seconds.

NOTE

.The initial display setting of the

driving information display has been

set to operational at the time of ship-

ment from the factory.

.The average fuel consumption and

average vehicle speed are calculated

even while the driving information dis-

play is not displayed.

.Even if you turn off the driving

3-38

information display, the display will

automatically turn on when the battery

voltage is disconnected and then re-

connected for battery replacement or

fuse replacement.

&Clock

If your vehicle is equipped with the

genuine SUBARU navigation system, the

clock of navigation system must be set

separately.

To adjust the time shown by the clock,

press the “+”button or “−”button. If you

press the “+”button, the indicated time will

change in one-minute increments. If you

press the “−”button, the indicated time will

change in one-minute decrements. If you

keep the button pressed, the rate at which

the indicated time changes will speed up.

The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour

clock displays. Perform the following

procedure to switch the display format.

1. Place the ignition switch in the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position.

2. Press and hold the “−”button that is

located near the clock display for approxi-

mately 5 seconds. The clock display will

then start to flash.

3. While the clock display is flashing,

press and hold the “+”button for approxi-

mately 2 seconds. The clock format will

then change.

4. The clock display will continue to flash

for approximately 3 seconds to inform you

that the clock display has been changed.

If you want to change the clock display

again, press and hold the “+”button for

approximately 2 seconds while the clock

display is flashing.

Multi information display

(models with type B combi-

nation meter)

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi information display while the

vehicle is in motion. When operation

of the multi information display

interferes with your ability to con-

centrate on driving, stop the vehicle

before performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from

the road and could result in an

accident.

Various information will be shown on the

multi information display. Also, a warning

message will appear on the display if a

malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,

several settings for the displayed content

can be performed.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

–CONTINUED –

3-39

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

Multi information display

1) Fuel gauge (refer to “Fuel gauge”F3-

12.)

2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning

screen”F3-41.)/Basic screen (refer to

“Basic screens”F3-41.)

3) Cruise control information display

4) Warning indicator

5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer

to “Select lever/gear position indicator

(CVT models)”F3-31.)

6) Odometer (refer to “Odometer”F3-10.)/

double trip meter (refer to “Double trip

meter”F3-10.)

Control switch

1) Up (select)

2) Set (enter)

3) Down (select)

&Basic operation

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the “/SET”

switch is pulled toward you, the item can

be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the “”information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with “”on the display,

pull the “/SET”switch on the steering

wheel toward you.

&Welcome screen and Good-

bye screen

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the

welcome screen will appear on the multi

information display for approximately 20

seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position, the multi informa-

tion display gradually turns off (Good-bye

screen).

NOTE

.The basic screen will be shown

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON”position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

3-40

.Once the welcome screen appears,

it takes a certain period of time to

display it again.

.If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door, the

welcome screen will not appear even

when the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

.The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry system

(all models) or the keyless access

function (if equipped) while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

.If any of the doors (including the

rear gate) is opened while the welcome

screen is displayed, the door ajar

warning will appear.

.The welcome screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome

Good-bye Screen”F3-43.

&Warning screen

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear for

approximately 3 seconds. Take the appro-

priate actions based on the messages

indicated.

&Basic screens

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the

screen that is always displayed.

Default screen:

Digital speedometer:

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

–CONTINUED –

3-41

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

SI-DRIVE mode screen (if equipped):

This screen indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode with its throttle angle.

Journey time screen:

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON”position).

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull the “/

SET”switch to enter the menu screen.

&Menu screens

Pull the “/SET”switch to enter the menu

screens when all of the following condi-

tions are satisfied.

.The vehicle has been completely

stopped.

.The select lever is in the “P”position.

.The menu screen entering screen is

selected.

.The “”information reminder is off.

3-42

The menu list is as follows.

First menu Second menu

Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen

Gauge Initial Movement

Languages

Go Back

EyeSight (models with the EyeSight system) Warning Volume

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function

Go Back

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) Warning Volume

RAB (if equipped) Warning Volume

Sonar Audible Alarm

Default Settings ―

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can select the menu.

Pull the “/SET”switch to enter the

selected menu.

NOTE

If you enter the “Go Back”menu, the

system will return to the previous

screen.

!Screen Settings

After entering the “Screen Settings”menu,

select one of the following menus.

!Welcome Good-bye Screen

The welcome screen/good-bye screens

can be activated or deactivated. Select

“On”to activate the screens. Select “Off”

to deactivate the screens.

!Gauge Initial Movement

The movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that occurs when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

Select “On”to activate. Select “Off”to

deactivate.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)

–CONTINUED –

3-43

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

!Languages

Operate the “”or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel to display the preferred

language. Then pull the “/SET”switch to

select the displayed language.

!EyeSight (models with the EyeSight

system)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

After entering the “EyeSight”menu, select

one of the following menus.

!BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

After entering the “BSD/RCTA”menu,

select the “Warning Volume”menu. You

can set the volume of the warning buzzer

for RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You

can select “Max”,“Mid”,“Min”or “Off”.

!RAB (if equipped)

NOTE

For models with the RAB (Reverse

Automatic Braking) system, refer to

“Reverse Automatic Braking System”

F7-67.

After entering the “RAB”menu, select one

of the following menus.

!Warning Volume

The volume of the warning sound that is

activated when the RAB (Reverse Auto-

matic Braking) system is in operation can

be set in 3 stages (“Max”,“Mid”and “Min”).

!Sonar Audible Alarm

The RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)

system is equipped with a function that

emits a warning sound when the system

operates. The function can be activated or

deactivated. Select “On”to set the warn-

ing sound to active. Select “Off”to set the

warning sound to inactive.

!Default Settings

Select “Yes”to use the menu screen to

restore customized settings to the factory

default settings. Select “No”to return to

the previous screen without restoring the

factory default settings.

Multi function display (if

equipped)

NOTE

.If your vehicle is equipped with an

information display (monochrome), re-

fer to “Information display (Mexico-

spec. models)”F3-34.

.Illustrations show the display for

U.S.-spec. models as an example. For

models other than U.S.-spec. models,

elements in the illustrations (such as

the display indication and measure-

ment unit) may be different than the

ones for U.S.-spec. models.

.When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections may

not be available.

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi function display while the

vehicle is in motion. When operation

of the multi function display is

disturbing your awareness and abil-

ity to concentrate on driving, stop

the vehicle in a safe place before

performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate

on the display while driving. Doing

3-44

so may cause you to look away from

the road and could result in an

accident.

The multi function display has the follow-

ing functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages,

such as warning information,

etc.

3-48

Displays basic screens (e.g.

fuel consumption screen, etc.) 3-49

Sets and adjusts maintenance

notification 3-76

Registers driving history 3-79

Sets and customizes car op-

eration 3-80

Reverse Automatic Braking

system display (if equipped) 7-67

Also, the multi function display can also be

used to set and initialize the multi function

display itself.

Multi function display

1) Outside temperature indicator

2) Information reminder (models with type A

combination meter)

3) Top display (For the display setting, refer

to “Top display setting”F3-68.)

4) Clock

5) Driving information display (For the dis-

played contents, refer to “Basic screens”

F3-49.)

&Basic operation

Control switch

1) Up (select)

2) ENTER (push)

3) Down (select)

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the button is

pushed, the item can be selected and set.

&Welcome screen

When the door is unlocked and the

driver’s door is closed, the welcome

screen will appear for a short time.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-45

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

NOTE

.The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON”position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

.If any of the doors (including the

rear gate) is opened while the welcome

screen is displayed, the door ajar

warning will appear.

.The welcome screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Bypass

screen setting”F3-74.

.For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared, it

may not appear again even when the

driver’s door is opened again. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

&Ending screen

Iftheignitionswitchisturnedtothe

“LOCK”/“OFF”position, one of the follow-

ing screens will be displayed as the

ending screen before the screen turns off.

.If “Eco Summary”is set to “Off”in the

“Bypass screen setting”: The “Goodbye”

screen will be displayed.

.If “Eco Summary”is set to “On”in the

“Bypass screen setting”: The “Fuel con-

sumption results screen”will be displayed.

For details about the bypass screen

setting, refer to “Bypass screen setting”

F3-74.

“Goodbye”screen

3-46

Fuel consumption results screen

1) The average fuel consumption for the

entire driving distance, from when the

ignition switch was turned to the “ON”

position to when it was turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position.

2) The average fuel consumption for the

driving interval displayed on the trip

meter at the point when the ignition

switch was turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position.

&Self-check screen

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position, the vehicle self-check will

be performed. The screens corresponding

to the following items will appear one after

another for several seconds each.

Type A combination meter

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement.

2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement.

3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.

4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

Type B combination meter

1) Windshield washer fluid: Checks the

level of windshield washer fluid.

2) Brake fluid: Checks the level of brake

fluid.

3) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement.

4) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement.

5) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.

6) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color

of the icon corresponding to the checked

item will turn green.

If there is no warning message, the self-

check will complete without notification.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-47

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Example of notification

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, the color of the

icon corresponding to the item will turn

yellow and the warning message or the

maintenance notification will be displayed.

Take the appropriate actions based on the

messages indicated.

NOTE

.The self-check screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “On/Off

setting”F3-77.

.After performing the maintenance,

change the setting of the correspond-

ing maintenance item. For details, refer

to “Maintenance settings”F3-76.

.The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed under either of the

following conditions.

–The period of time remaining

until the registered notification date

is 15 days or less.

–The total driving distance remain-

ing until the registered notification

distance is approximately 311 miles

(500 km) or less.

.The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed until either of the

following conditions is satisfied.

–The period of time passed after

the registered notification date is 15

days or more.

–The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance is

approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

more.

&Interruption screen

Warning information (display example)

Useful messages, such as reminder in-

formation, vehicle information, warning

information, etc. may interrupt the current

screen and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. Take proper action

according to the message.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. If

the warning screen can be displayed

again, an information reminder “”will

appear on the upper left part of the

display. To recall the message marked

with “”on the display, push the

button.

3-48

&Basic screens

These are the basic screens of the multi

function display.

Item Page

Information bar 3-49

Fuel consumption screen 3-50

ECO gauge screen 3-51

ECO history screen 3-51

Vehicle activation status

screen 3-51

EyeSight screen (models with

the EyeSight system) 3-53

“Boost pressure”and “Accel-

erator opening ratio”screen

(turbo models)

3-53

Triple meter screen 3-54

Guidance screen 3-54

Clock/calendar screen 3-55

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, you can switch the screen that is

always displayed. Also, when the

button is pushed and held, the selection

screen can be displayed. For details about

the selection screen, refer to “Selection

screen”F3-56.

!Information bar

1) Information bar

2) Outside temperature indicator

3) Information reminder (models with type A

combination meter)

4) Top display

5) Clock

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”or

“ON”position, the outside temperature

indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the

information bar.

!Outside temperature indicator

This displays the outside temperature

between −408F(−408C) and 1228F

(508C).

Icy road surface warning screen

When the outside temperature becomes

378F(38C) or less, the icy road surface

warning screen interrupts to inform the

driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

.The indicator may give a false read-

ing under any of the following condi-

tions:

–When the sensor is exposed in

direct sun light.

–When idling; when running at low

speeds in a traffic jam, or when the

engine is restarted immediately fol-

lowing a shut-down.

–When the actual outside tem-

perature falls outside the specified

indicator range.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-49

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

.The icy road surface warning screen

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the road

surface before driving.

.Once the icy road surface warning

screen is displayed, it will not be

displayed again unless the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC”or “ON”

position after it has been turned to

“LOCK”/“OFF”position.

!Information reminder

The screen returns to the original screen

several seconds after the interruption

screen has been displayed. If the inter-

ruption screen can be displayed once

more even after the original screen has

appeared, an information reminder should

be displayed. For details about the inter-

ruption screen, refer to “Interruption

screen”F3-48.

!Top display

One of the following items can be dis-

played on the top display.

.Average fuel consumption correspond-

ing to the driving distance of each trip

meter

.Current fuel consumption (This may

not be displayed when driving at a low

speed.)

.Driving range on remaining fuel

For details about the setting of the top

display, refer to “Top display setting”F3-

68.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is calculated using the average fuel

consumption of the last 19 miles (30

km) driven. This value may be different

from the values calculated using the

average fuel consumption correspond-

ing to the driving distance of each trip

meter or the current fuel consumption.

!Clock

The clock can be displayed in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For details

about the setting, refer to “Current date

and time setting”F3-59.

NOTE

If the vehicle battery is disconnected,

the clock shown in the information bar

will be reset. Set the time again after

the vehicle battery is connected. For

details about the setting, refer to “Top

display setting”F3-68.

!Fuel consumption screen

1) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

2) Current fuel consumption

3) Driving range on remaining fuel

The displayed location can be custo-

mized. For details, refer to “Fuel consump-

tion screen setting”F3-69.

3-50

!ECO gauge screen

1) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

2) ECO gauge

The gauge pointer shows the difference

between the current fuel consumption and

the average fuel consumption that is

displayed on the center part of the screen.

If the gauge pointer moves toward the

green side, this indicates better fuel

efficiency.

!ECO history screen

1) Average fuel consumption per unit time

(bar graph)

2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

(red line)

This screen displays the fuel economy

history for the vehicle using a bar graph.

The horizontal scale represents the past

time range and the vertical scale repre-

sents the fuel consumption. The green

bars show driving with good fuel economy

and the yellow bars show driving with poor

fuel economy.

The time range of the history can be set.

The width of the bar graph is adjusted as

follows depending on the set time range.

Time range Width of bar graph

30 minutes 1 minute

60 minutes 2 minutes

120 minutes 4 minutes

For details about the setting, refer to

“Economy history setting”F3-70.

!Vehicle activation status screen

When the vehicle stops

1) Steering axle

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-51

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

When the vehicle is being driven regularly

1) Power train (illuminated in blue)

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem is being activated: the tires illuminate

in yellow.

1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control

system activation

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem has been activated: the tires remain

illuminated in yellow while the Vehicle

Dynamics Control System is activated.

1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System)

2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-

ating indicator (flashing in yellow)

3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control

system activation

When the X-mode is selected (if equipped)

1) Hill descent control indicator

This screen displays the following vehicle

information.

.steering angle and driving wheel status

.activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System)

.activation status of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system

.activation status of the X-mode (if

equipped)

While driving, the vehicle wheels are

illuminated in blue and the driving direc-

tion is represented using an animation of

the traffic lane.

If the ABS is activated, all of the vehicle’s

wheels will be illuminated in yellow and

3-52

the length of operation in seconds and the

number of activations will be displayed in

the bar indicator, located on the lowermost

part of the display.

If the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

activated, the activated vehicle wheels will

be illuminated in yellow and the operating

indicator “”will appear on the upper right

part of the display. Also, the length of

operation in seconds and the number of

activations will be displayed in the bar

indicator.

!EyeSight screen (models with the

EyeSight system)

1) Current vehicle speed

2) Set vehicle speed

3) Preceding vehicle

4) Your vehicle

This screen displays the status of the

EyeSight system.

!“Boost pressure”and “Accelerator

opening ratio”screen (turbo mod-

els)

1) Boost pressure (digital format)

2) Boost pressure (analog format)

3) Accelerator opening ratio (digital format)

4) Accelerator opening ratio (analog format)

5) Peak value of boost pressure (digital

format)

6) Peak value of boost pressure (analog

format)

This screen displays the boost pressure,

the accelerator opening ratio and the peak

value of the boost pressure in both the

digital and analog formats.

Also, the peak value of the boost pressure

is stored if the ignition switch is turned to

the “ACC”or “LOCK”/“OFF”position. To

reset the peak value, perform the following

procedure.

Resetting procedure of boost pressure

peak value

1. Push the button while the “Boost

pressure”and “Accelerator opening ratio”

screen is displayed. Then the following

confirmation screen will appear.

2. Select “Yes”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the resetting by

pushing the button.

If you select “No”, the current peak value

is still kept.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-53

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

!Triple meter screen

Triple meter screen (display example)

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

The items shown in the triple meter screen

can be changed. For details, refer to

“Triple meter setting”F3-72.

Item Details

Average vehicle speed (Average

vehicle speed for the entire driving

time from when the trip meter was

reset)

Lifetime fuel consumption

Engine oil temperature

Accelerator opening ratio

Boost pressure (turbo models

only)

Journey time (the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON”position)

Journey distance (the distance

that has been driven since the

ignition switch was turned to the

“ON”position)

Average fuel consumption for the

entire driving distance from when

the ignition switch was turned to

the “ON”position

!Guidance screen

When the button is pushed and held,

the selection screen can be displayed.

The displayed contents can be set or

customized from the selection screen. For

details, refer to “Selection screen”F3-56.

3-54

!Clock/calendar screen

Clock (Type A)

Clock (Type B)

Calendar

1) Today’s date

2) Birthday/Anniversary

In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-

side temperature and average fuel con-

sumption can also be displayed.

You can select clock (Type A), clock (Type

B) or calendar. The clock/calendar can

also be set so that it is not displayed. For

details, refer to “Clock/calendar screen

setting”F3-73.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-55

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

&Selection screen

When the button is pushed and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by operating

the “”or “ ” switch.

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Time/Date Time/Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-59

Birthday Set a birthday. 3-60

Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-62

Daylight Saving Time Turn the daylight saving time on or off 3-65

Go Back Return to the top menu. —

Display Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔−53-66

Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off 3-66

Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-67

Go Back Return to the top menu. —

Screen Setting Top Display Set and customize the top display information

contents.

Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range or

Off 3-68

Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display. 3-69

Eco History Set and customize the time of logging fuel

consumption history. 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 3-70

Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. 3-72

Clock Select the clock format. Type A, Type B, Calendar or Off 3-73

Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-74

Languages Select the display language. English or French or Spanish

(U.S.-spec. models only) 3-75

Go Back Return to the top menu. —

3-56

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-76

Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-77

Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-77

Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-77

On/Off

Turn on or off the self-check screen that is

activated when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON”position.

On or Off 3-77

Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-78

Go Back Return to the top menu. —

Driving History Set Register and overwrite the driving record. 3-79

Go Back Return to the top menu. —

Car Setting Keyless Buzzer Volume Set the audible signal volume. 0 (OFF) to 7 3-81

Hazard Warning Flasher Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off 3-82

Defogger Set and customize the operation of the defogger. 15 minutes or Continuous 3-83

Interior Light Set and customize the interior light off delay

timer. 10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 3-84

Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto

light sensor. Low, Mid, High or Max 3-85

Keyless Access Setting (if

equipped) Set and customize the keyless access function. Driver’s Door Unlock 3-86

Rear Gate Unlock 3-88

Welcome Lighting Set the leaving time and approaching time. 30, 60, 90 seconds or Off 3-89

Go Back Return to top menu. —

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-57

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Initialize Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-90

Lifetime Fuel Consumption Reset Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No 3-91

Go Back Return to the top menu. —

Go Back —Return to the top menu. —

3-58

&Date and time settings

The items in the date and time settings

can be set. To change the items, operate

the “”or “ ” switch.

NOTE

.The “Time/Date”item must be set to

display the “Birthday”,“Anniversary”

and notifications for vehicle mainte-

nance.

.The “Birthday”and “Anniversary”

items can be entered after the “Time/

Date”item has been set.

.Dates that do not exist in the

Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for

example, April 31).

.If your vehicle is equipped with

genuine SUBARU navigation system,

the clock of navigation system must be

set separately.

!Preparation for date setting

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Time/Date”item. Then, push the

button.

!Current date and time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting”F3-

59.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Time/Date”item. Then push

the button.

3. Select the item to set by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-59

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Select a number by operating the “ ”

or “”switch. Then push the button.

When “12 h”is selected, the clock will be

set to a 12-hour display. When “24 h”is

selected, the clock will be set to a 24-hour

display.

5. After entering the date and time, select

“Set”by operating the “”switch and

confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Birthday setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting”F3-

59.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Birthday”item. Then push the

button.

3. Select an entry in the list to set by

operating the “”or “ ” switch. Then

push the button.

3-60

4. The selected item will be shown. Push

the button to set the selected item.

5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”

or “”switch. Then push the button.

6. After entering the date by repeating

step 5, you can enter the name.

7. Select characters by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

–You can select characters of the

English alphabet (upper case charac-

ters and lower case characters are

available), eleven symbols or blank

spaces.

–The word being edited will be

displayed with an underline.

8. After entering the name by repeating

step 7, select “Set”by operating the “”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-61

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

9. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If a birthday is approaching, the following

screen will be displayed accompanied by

a beep when the ignition switch has been

turned to the “ON”position. This function

can be set to on or off. For details, refer to

“Bypass screen setting”F3-74.

From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday

On a birthday (displayed in red)

NOTE

.If “__”is selected for either the

“Month”or “Day”item instead of

numbers, the birthday notification will

be deactivated.

.You can store a maximum of 5

birthdays.

!Anniversary setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting”F3-

59.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Anniversary”item. Then push

the button.

3-62

3. Select an entry in the list to set by

operating the “”or “ ” switch. Then

push the button.

4. The selected item will be shown. Push

the button to set the selected item.

5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”

or “”switch. Then push the button.

6. After entering the date by repeating

step 5, you can enter the name.

7. Select characters by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

–You can select characters of the

English alphabet (upper case charac-

ters and lower case characters are

available), eleven symbols or blank

spaces.

–The word being edited will be

displayed with an underline.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-63

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

8. After entering the name by repeating

step 7, select “Set”by operating the “”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

9. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If an anniversary is approaching, the

following screen will be displayed accom-

panied by a beep when the ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON”position. This

function can be set to on or off. For details,

refer to “Bypass screen setting”F3-74.

From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary

On an anniversary (displayed in orange)

NOTE

.If “__”is selected for either the

“Month”or “Day”item instead of

numbers, the anniversary notification

will be deactivated.

.You can store a maximum of 5

anniversaries.

!Clearing birthday or anniversary

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting”F3-59

and display “Birthday”or “Anniversary”on

the screen.

2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver-

sary.

3. When “__”is selected for either the

“Month”or “Day”item instead of numbers,

the setting of “Birthday”or “Anniversary”

3-64

will be cleared.

!Daylight saving time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting”F3-

59.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Daylight Saving Time”item.

Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select “On”or “Off”by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-65

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

&Image quality and volume

settings

The image quality and volume settings

can be adjusted. To change the items,

operate the “”or “ ” switch.

!Preparation for image quality and

volume settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Display”item. Then, push the button.

!Contrast setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for image quality and

volume settings”F3-66.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Contrast”item. Then push the

button.

3. Select a contrast level by operating the

“”or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting

by pushing the button.

!Screen OFF setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for image quality and

volume settings”F3-66.

3-66

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Screen Off”item. Then push

the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. The screen is turned off.

Restoring the screen

When the “”,“ ” or button is

pushed after the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON”position, the screen will be

restored. The screen will be restored with

the basic screen that was displayed when

the screen was turned off. While the

screen is off, a warning message will be

displayed if necessary, but other screens

will not be displayed.

!Beep volume setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for image quality and

volume settings”F3-66.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Beep”item. Then push the

button.

3. Push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-67

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or

“”switch. Then push the button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

&Screen settings

The items in screen settings can be set.

To change the items, operate the “”or

“”switch, and then push the button.

!Preparation for screen settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Screen Setting”item. Then, push the

button.

!Top display setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

3-68

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Top Display”item. Then push

the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or

“”switch. Then push the button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Fuel consumption screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-69

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Cons”item. Then push the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select the displayed configuration by

operating the “”or “ ” switch. Then

push the button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Economy history setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

3-70

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Eco History”item. Then push

the button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select the time of the logged fuel

consumption history by operating the

“”or “ ” switch, and then push the

button.

5. Select “Go Back”by operating the “ ”

switch.

6. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

7. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-71

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

!Triple meter setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Triple Meter”item. Then push

the button.

3. Select the setting location (left, center

or right) by operating the “”or “ ”

switch. Then push the button.

NOTE

The same item cannot be selected for

the left, center or right location.

4. Select the preferred item by operating

the “”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

If you also want to change the setting for

another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

3-72

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Clock/calendar screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Clock”item. Then push the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select “Type A clock”,“Type B clock”,

“Calendar”or “Off”by operating the “”

switch. Then push the button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-73

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Bypass screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Bypass Screen”item. Then

push the button.

3. Select the item to set by operating the

“”or “ ” switches. Then push the

button.

4. Select “On”or “Off”by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

If you want to change setting for another

item, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ” or

3-74

“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by

pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Language setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-68.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Languages”item. Then push

the button.

3. The current language setting will be

displayed. Push the button to enter

the language selection mode.

4. Select the preferred language by

operating the “”or “ ” switch. Then

push the button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-75

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

&Maintenance settings

The items in the maintenance settings can

be set. To change the items, operate the

“”or “ ” switch.

!Preparation for maintenance set-

tings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Maintenance”item. Then, push the

button.

!Engine oil setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-

tings”F3-76.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Engine Oil”item. Then push

the button.

3. Select the setting location (month, day,

year or distance) by operating the “”or

“”switch. Then push the button.

3-76

4. Select a number by operating the “ ”

or “”switch. Then push the button.

If you also want to change the setting for

another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ” or

“”switch and confirm the setting by

pushing the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

NOTE

.The notification will be displayed

with information of both date and

distance or either date or distance in

accordance with the setting

.When “__”is selected for either the

“Month”,“Day”,“Year”or “Distance”

item instead of numbers, the set noti-

fication will be deactivated.

.If the notification continues for 15

days or more, the system will display

“__”on the screen.

.When the distance announcement

reaches 0 km, the display will show

“0000”for the next 311 miles (500 km).

After exceeding 311 miles (500 km), “_

___”will be displayed.

!Oil filter setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting”F3-76, but select the

“Oil Filter”item in step 2.

!Tires setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting”F3-76, but select the

“Tires”item in step 2.

!Maintenance schedule setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting”F3-76, but select the

“Maintenance Schedule”item in step 2.

!On/Off setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-

tings”F3-76.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-77

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “On/Off”item. Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select “On”or “Off”by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Clear setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-

tings”F3-76.

3-78

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Clear All Settings”item. Then

push the button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No”is selected first). To clear

all maintenance settings, select “Yes”by

operating the “”switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

5. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

&Driving history registration

The items in the driving history can be

registered. To change the items, operate

the “”or “ ” switch, and then push the

button.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Driving History”item. Then, push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-79

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Push the button once more to

enter the setting mode.

5. The system will notify you of the place

to be selected for approximately 2 sec-

onds.

6. Select one of the registration lines by

operating the “”or “ ” switch. Then

push the button.

7. To overwrite the previous registration,

push the button. When registration is

performed the first time, it is registered

directly without a notification.

8. The system will notify you that the

registration is complete.

NOTE

The driving history can be registered

for the trip meter A or B.

&Car settings

The items in the car settings can be set.

To change the items, operate the “”or

“”switch, and then push the button.

NOTE

When the vehicle is in motion, the

selectable items will be limited.

3-80

!Preparation for car settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Car Setting”item. Then, push the

button.

!Keyless buzzer volume setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Keyless Buzzer Volume”item.

Then push the button.

3. Select a volume level by operating the

“”or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting

by pushing the button.

4. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-81

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

!Hazard warning flasher setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Hazard Warning Flasher”item.

Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select “On”or “Off”by operating the

“”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

3-82

!Defogger setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Defogger”item. Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-83

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

!Interior light off delay timer setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Interior Light”item. Then push

the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

3-84

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

!Auto light sensor sensitivity setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Auto Light Sensor”item. Then

push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-85

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

!Keyless access setting (models

with “keyless access with push-

button start system”)

!Preparation for keyless access

settings

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Keyless Access Setting”item.

Then push the button.

!Driver’s door unlock setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for keyless access

settings”F3-86.

3-86

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Driver’s Door Unlock”item.

Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-87

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

!Rear gate unlock setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for keyless access

settings”F3-86.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Rear Gate Unlock”item. Then

push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “”or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

3-88

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

!Welcome lighting setting

The leaving time and approaching time

settings can be adjusted.

!Leaving time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings”F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Welcome Lighting”item, and

then push the button.

3. Select the “Leaving time set”by

operating the “”or “ ” switch, and then

push the button.

4. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the button to enter the selection

mode.

5. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “”or “ ” switch, and then push

the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-89

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

6. Select “Set”by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the button.

7. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

!Approaching time setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Leaving time setting”F3-89, but select

the “Approaching time set”item in step 3.

&Initialize

Items that have been set to your pre-

ference can be initialized. To select an

initialization menu, operate the “”or “ ”

switch as follows.

!Preparation for initialization

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “”or “ ” switch to show the

“Initialize”item. Then, push the button.

!Reset to factory default settings

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for initialization”F3-

90.

3-90

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Reset to Defaults”item. Then

push the button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No”is selected first). To return

to the factory default settings, select “Yes”

by operating the “”switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

5. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

!Lifetime fuel consumption resetting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for initialization”F3-

90.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption

Resetting”item. Then push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

–CONTINUED –

3-91

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No”is selected first). To reset

the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes”

by operating the “”switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If

you are sure you want to proceed, select

“Yes”by operating the “”switch.

6. Confirm the setting again by pushing

the button.

7. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

3-92

Light control switch

CAUTION

.Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

.Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the lights are turned off.

If the vehicle is left unattended

for a long time with the lights

illuminated, the battery may be

discharged.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON”position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be oper-

ated (except auto on/off headlights),

even under the following conditions.

.when the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

.when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off (models with “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, the chirp sound will inform

the driver that the lights are illumi-

nated.

&Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

“”position

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

“”position

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

–CONTINUED –

3-93

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

“ ” position: auto on/off headlights (if

equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

“”position

The headlights are all off.

NOTE

The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-

lights can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer

for details. Also, for models with a multi

function display, the setting can be

changed using the display. For details,

refer to “Auto light sensor sensitivity

setting”F3-85.

!Welcome lighting function (if

equipped)

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlights for smooth ap-

proaching to or exiting from the vehicle

at night or in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

.The light control switch is in the

“AUTO”position

.It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors (including the rear gate) by

using the remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is performed, the low beam

headlights will turn off.

.The doors are locked.

.The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

.The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operations is performed.

.Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis

turned to the “OFF”status (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”)

.The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

The low beam headlights will turn off

under any of the following conditions.

.3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by the

welcome lighting function.

.30 seconds have passed since the

door is opened and closed.

.The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

.The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking procedure

twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which

the low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details.

3-94

!Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights (if equipped)

The sensor is on the instrument panel as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

&High/low beam change

(dimmer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “”on the combina-

tion meter is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the center position.

!High beam assist function (if

equipped)

NOTE

.The high beam assist function uti-

lizes the stereo camera installed at the

position of the front map lights.

.For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

.When the vehicle speed increases to

or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

.There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

.The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

.The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions is

met, the headlight will change to low

beam.

.When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

.When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

.When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

.When the EyeSight system is malfunc-

tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as “operational”.

This setting can be changed to OFF

(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

–CONTINUED –

3-95

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

!How to use the high beam assist

function

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

.The light control switch is in the

“AUTO”position and the low beam head-

lights are on automatically.

.The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or is temporarily

stopped, the headlight will be fixed at

low beam. For details, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

!How to temporarily lower the

sensitivity of the high beam

assist function

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by performing the

following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the

“ON”position, set the light control switch

to the “AUTO”position and push the signal

lever forward (high beam position).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15

seconds, press the “”(following dis-

tance setting) switch more than 10 times

consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the high beam

assist indicator light “”on the combina-

tion meter will flash.

NOTE

.The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function cannot be lowered in

the following conditions.

–Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise

Control is in operation

–The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated

.The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function returns to normal level

the next time the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position

and the engine is restarted.

!How to change the headlight

mode manually

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to

the center position, the high beam assist

function will turn off and the high beam

assist indicator will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to

the “”position, the headlight mode will

be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

will turn off and the high beam indicator

light will turn on.

3-96

NOTE

.After manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

on the high beam assist function,

return the light control switch to the

“AUTO”position.

.When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

the light control switch to the “”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, parking lights, front side marker

lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights will be on.

!Tips for the high beam assist

system

.The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the condition surrounding the vehi-

cle based on the brightness of illumination

ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the

headlight mode may switch in some

situations that do not match to the driver’s

sense.

.A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

.Under the following situations, the

brightness of ambient illumination may

not be detected correctly and the high

beam assist function may not work prop-

erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam

may disturb the driving of an oncoming

vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low

beam mode may continue although there

are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles

ahead. In the such cases, change the

headlight mode manually.

–In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.)

–When the windshield glass is dirty

or fogged

–When the windshield is cracked or

damaged

–When the stereo camera is de-

formed or the stereo camera lenses

are dirty

–If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the

surrounding area

–When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead is driven without its head-

lights and tail lights on

–If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the

light beams are not aimed correctly

–When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving

–When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven surfaces

–When driving on a road with many

curves

–When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead

–When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, reflects

light strongly

–When the headlights of your vehicle

are damaged or dirty

–When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is

being towed

–Immediately after the engine has

started

.In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically chan-

ged from the high beam to the low beam.

–When your vehicle passes an on-

coming vehicle suddenly in a blind

curve

–When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle

–When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead comes in and out of view

because of continuous curves, median

strips, roadside trees, etc.

.If the stereo camera detects the light of

the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,

the headlight mode may change from the

high beam to the low beam automatically.

.The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the low

beam mode may continue, when affected

by a street light, traffic signal, illumination

of an advertisement board, or a reflective

object such as a road sign and signboard.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

–CONTINUED –

3-97

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

.The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

–Color or brightness of the head-

lights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail

lights of a vehicle ahead

–The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle

ahead are covered with mud, snow,

etc.

–Movement and direction of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead

–When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead illuminate on only one side

–When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle

–Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.)

–Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo

–Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera

&Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

“”(off) position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “”on the

combination meter also illuminates.

&Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination of

the high beam headlights is reduced

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “”position when it

is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness

when the following conditions are fulfilled.

.The engine is running.

.The parking brake is fully released.

.The light control switch is in the

“AUTO”(if equipped), “”or off position.

.For CVT models, the select lever is in a

position other than the “P”position.

NOTE

.When the hazard warning flasher is

on, the daytime running lights will not

operate.

.When the turn signal is activated,

the daytime running light will not

operate for the side on which the turn

signal is flashing.

.When the light switch is in the “”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

3-98

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

.For models with the auto on/off

headlights, while the light control

switch is in the “AUTO”position and

the system is activated to the auto-on

mode depending on the ambient light

level, the high beam headlights that

have illuminated at reduced brightness

turn off, and the low beam headlights

turn on alternatively. At this time, the

instrument panel illumination, front

side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate lights are also illuminated.

!Models with LED headlights

For models with LED headlights, the

parking lights are illuminated by the day-

time running light system.

Steering Responsive Head-

light (SRH) (if equipped)

1) The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated

2) The target area of illumination when SRH

is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically

moves the headlight beam to the left or

right in accordance with the steering angle

and vehicle speed. This function helps to

improve the visibility at night by illuminat-

ing the road ahead at corners and inter-

sections.

NOTE

SRH only activates when the vehicle is

traveling forward at the speed of ap-

proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and over.

&SRH OFF switch

You can turn the SRH function on or off by

pressing the SRH OFF switch.

Type A combination meter

Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

–CONTINUED –

3-99

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever

Type B combination meter

1) SRH OFF indicator

2) Warning screen

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

tion meter turns off when SRH is turned

on.

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned

off.

For models with type A combination

meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH

OFF indicator on the combination meter

blinks when the ignition switch is in the

“ON”position. It indicates that SRH has

been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

For models with type B combination

meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, a mes-

sage appears on the warning screen when

the ignition switch is in the “ON”position. It

indicates that SRH has been deactivated.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

NOTE

.If you turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF”position with SRH turned off and

then start the engine again, SRH will

automatically turn on.

.When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON”position, the SRH OFF indi-

cator will illuminate and turn off after

several seconds.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal

indicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

3-100

&One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

The operational/non-operational setting of

the one-touch lane changer can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Illumination brightness con-

trol

The illumination brightness of the instru-

ment panel dims under the following

conditions.

.when the light switch is in the “”or

“”position

.when the light control switch is in the

“AUTO”position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically (models with auto on/

off headlights: Refer to “Headlights”F3-

93.)

You can also adjust the illumination bright-

ness for better visibility in the following

ways.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

For models with the multi function display,

the display automatically adjusts its bright-

ness together with the brightness level of

the instrument panel. To adjust the dis-

play’s contrast, refer to “Contrast setting”

F3-66.

NOTE

.When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

.The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position.

Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control 3-101

Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler

Headlight beam leveler (if

equipped)

&Automatic headlight beam

leveler (models with LED

headlights)

The LED headlights generate more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience too much glare if your

headlight beam height adjustment is high

when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.

The automatic headlight beam leveler

adjusts the headlight beam height auto-

matically and optimally according to the

load being carried by the vehicle.

Fog light switch (if equipped)

1) Headlight switch

2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the

fog light switch is placed in the “”

position while the headlights are in the

following condition.

.while the headlight switch is in the “”

position

.for models with the auto on/off head-

lights, while the headlight switch is in the

“AUTO”position and the headlights turn

on automatically

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the

switch back down to the “”position.

Front fog light indicator (type A)

Front fog light indicator (type B)

The indicator light on the combination

meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are illuminated.

3-102

&Steering responsive fog

lights system (if equipped)

The steering responsive fog lights system

automatically turns the front fog light on

and off based on the steering angle and

vehicle speed when entering a curve or

driving on curved roads. The system is

intended to help prevent accidents by

enabling better visibility of curves ahead

and early recognition of any disabled

vehicles or other obstacles.

The front fog light on the inside of a curve

will turn on if all of the following conditions

are met.

.The light control switch is in the “”

position, or the light control switch is in the

“AUTO”position and the low beam head-

lights are turned on automatically

.The fog light switch is in the “”

position

.The low beam mode is selected

.The select lever is in the “D”position or

the manual mode is selected

.The steering responsive fog lights

system has not been deactivated

.The operating conditions such as the

steering angle and vehicle speed are met

The front fog lights on both sides will turn

on as usual if all of the following conditions

are met.

.The light control switch is in either of

the following positions.

–in the “”position

–in the “AUTO”position and the low

beam headlights turn on automatically

.The fog light switch is in the “”

position

.The low beam mode is selected

!Steering responsive fog lights OFF

switch

Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

Press this switch to deactivate the steer-

ing responsive fog lights system. Press

the switch again to activate the system.

!Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indica-

tor

This indicator on the combination meter

illuminates when the steering responsive

fog lights system is deactivated. This

indicator turns off when the system is

activated.

Instruments and controls/Fog light switch 3-103

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

.Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blade rubbers

and might cause the wiper motor

to fail. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear

window, always use the wind-

shield washer.

.In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blade rubbers are not

frozen to the windshield or rear

window before switching on the

wipers. Attempting to operate the

wiper with the wiper blade rub-

bers frozen to the window glass

could cause not only the wiper

blade rubbers to be damaged but

also might cause the wiper motor

to fail. If the wiper blade rubbers

are frozen to the window glass,

be sure to operate the defroster,

windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped) or rear window defog-

ger before turning on the wiper.

.If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF”po-

sition and clean the window

glass to allow proper wiper op-

eration.

.Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield washer

fluid”F11-30.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

.Do not clean the wiper blades or

wiper blade rubbers with gaso-

line or a solvent, such as paint

thinner or benzine. This will

cause deterioration of the wiper

blades or wiper blade rubbers.

NOTE

.The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates continu-

ously under an unusually heavy load,

the circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

.Clean your wiper blade rubbers and

window glass periodically with a

washer solution to prevent streaking,

and to remove accumulations of road

salt or road film. Operate the wind-

3-104

shield washer for at least 1 second so

that washer solution will be sprinkled

all over the windshield or rear window.

.Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blade rubbers results in jerky wiper

operation and streaking on the glass. If

you cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blade rubbers using a

sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner.

After cleaning, rinse the window glass

and wiper blade rubbers with clean

water. The glass is clean if no beads

form on the glass when you rinse with

water.

.If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades or wiper blade

rubbers with new ones. For replace-

ment instructions, refer to “Replace-

ment of wiper blades”F11-32.

&Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON”position.

!Windshield wipers

: Mist (for a single wipe)

:Off

: Intermittent

: Low speed

:High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “”position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

!Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

–CONTINUED –

3-105

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

!Windshield washer

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type A)

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type B)

The windshield washer fluid warning

light illuminates when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light illumi-

nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the

refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-

shield washer fluid”F11-30.

&Rear window wiper and

washer switch

:Washer (accompanied by wiper op-

eration)

: Continuous

: Intermittent

:Off

:Washer (accompanied by wiper op-

eration)

3-106

!Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob

switch upward.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob

switch to the “”position.

With the switch turned to the “”posi-

tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-

tently at intervals corresponding to the

vehicle speed. In this position, when you

move the select lever to the “R”position

(CVT models) or the shift lever to the

reverse position (MT models), the rear

wiper will switch to continuous operation.

When you move the select lever/shift lever

from the “R”(reverse) position to another

position, the rear wiper will return to

intermittent operation.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs

the rear wiper operation on the rear

gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.

NOTE

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the

“”position, while the shift lever/

select lever is in the “R”position with

the windshield wiper operating con-

tinuously, the rear wiper will operate

intermittently.

!Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob switch

upward to the “”position. The washer

fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch

downward to the “”position. The washer

fluid sprays and the wiper operates until

you release the knob.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

&Inside mirror

1) Normal position

2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the

antiglare position.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

–CONTINUED –

3-107

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

&Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass (if equipped)

1) Display

2) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

preserve your vision.

!To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

Press the “”switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s

green LED indicator is on. The auto-

dimming feature will default to on with

each ignition cycle.

!To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “”switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive

the vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “”switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

thedisplay,togglethe“”switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass

direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “”switch for more than 9 seconds or

until a “C”appears in the display. Once a

“C”appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

3-108

&Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass with HomeLink

(if

equipped)

1) Display

2) HomeLink Buttons

3) Switch

Congratulations! Your new automobile is

equipped with an automatic dimming

mirror manufactured by Gentex Corpora-

tion. During nighttime driving, the auto-

dimming feature senses distracting glare

from vehicle headlights behind you and

automatically dims to eliminate the glare

and preserve your vision.

!To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

Press the “”switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s

green LED indicator is on. The auto-

dimming feature will default to on with

each ignition cycle.

!To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “”switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive

the vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “”switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

thedisplay,togglethe“”switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass

direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “”switch for more than 9 seconds or

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

–CONTINUED –

3-109

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

until a “C”appears in the display. Once a

“C”appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

!HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up

to three hand-held radio-frequency re-

motes used to activate devices such as

gate operators, garage door openers,

entry door locks, security systems, even

home lighting. The below steps are

generic programming instructions; for

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site. Additional information and program-

ming videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

.Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

.When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

.Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

.It is also recommended that a

new battery be placed in the

hand-held remote (garage door

opener remote) of the device for

quicker and more accurate train-

ing.

.Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be turned to the

“ON”or “ACC”position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of

HomeLink.

.Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink program-

ming. It is also suggested that

upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink buttons

be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-

tons”F3-113.

!Programming a New HomeLink

Button

1) Indicator Light

2) HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.

The HomeLink indicator light will flash

orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing

HomeLink Buttons”F3-113).

3-110

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink button that

you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you

have difficulty with the programming

process.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the hand-

held remote button. Continue pressing the

hand-held remote button until the

HomeLink indicator light changes from

orange to green. You may now release

the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to

replace this “Programming a New

HomeLink Button”step 3 with proce-

dures noted in the “Gate Operator /

Canadian Programming”section. Refer

to “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-

ming”F3-113.

1) Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

.If the indicator light remains con-

stant green, your device should oper-

ate when the HomeLink button is

pressed. At this point, if your device

operates, programming is complete.

.If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the HomeLink

button up to three times to complete

the programming process. At this point

if your device operates, programming

is complete. If the device does not

operate, continue with the next step of

the programming instructions.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

–CONTINUED –

3-111

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

1) “Learn”button

5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc...) locate the

“Learn”,“Smart”,or“Program”button. This

can usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-

head unit (see the device’s manual to

identify this button). The name and color

of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”,or“Program”button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the

HomeLink button up to three times. At this

point programming is complete and your

device should operate when the

HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1) Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”

F3-113.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

3-112

!Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out”in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink Button”step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote

every two seconds until the HomeLink

indicator light changes from orange to

green. You may now release the hand-

held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling”pro-

cess to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button”step 4 to complete.

!Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink button. Activation

will now occur for the trained device (i.e.

garage door opener, gate operator, secur-

ity system, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-

held remote of the device may also be

used at any time.

!Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed”as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed

at any time beginning with “Programming

a New HomeLink Button”- step 1.

!Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink Button

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink button can be released at this

point. Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button”- step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it will

revert to the previously stored program-

ming.

!Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

HomeLink has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink can receive and display “clos-

ing”or “opening”status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

–CONTINUED –

3-113

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

!Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a

new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status

indicators flashed, two-way communica-

tion programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

!Using Two-Way Communication

1) Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and

2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display

the last recorded status for three seconds.

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blink-

ing Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators.

!Certification

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

3-114

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at

1-800-355-3515.

.U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

.Canada-spec. models

.WARNING: The transmitter has been

tested and complies with FCC and IC

rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

device.

.This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

an uncontrolled environment. End

Users must follow the specific operat-

ing instructions for satisfying RF ex-

posure compliance. This transmitter

must be at least 20 cm from the user

and must not be co-located or operat-

inginconjunctionwithanyother

antenna or transmitter.

.The term “IC:”before the certifica-

tion/registration number only signifies

that Industry Canada technical specifi-

cations were met.

HomeLink

and the HomeLink House

logo are registered trademarks of Gentex

Corporation.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

–CONTINUED –

3-115

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

&Outside mirrors

!Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the

distance of vehicles behind you

when changing lanes. Use the inside

mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and dis-

tance of objects that you view in

convex mirror.

!Remote control mirror switch

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”or

“ACC”position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L”is for the left mirror,

“R”is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional opera-

tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

Defogger and deicer

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

3-116

vated only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON”position.

Climate control system type A and type B

Climate control system type C and type D

To activate the defogger and deicer

system, press the control switch that is

located on the climate control panel. The

rear window defogger, outside mirror

defogger and windshield wiper deicer are

activated simultaneously. The indicator

light on the control switch illuminates while

the defogger and deicer system is acti-

vated.

To turn them off, press the control switch

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC”or “LOCK”/

“OFF”position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and the

outside mirrors have been cleared and the

windshield wiper blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, press

the control switch to turn them off. If

defrosting, defogging or deicing is not

complete, you have to press the control

switch to turn them on again.

For models with the automatic climate

control system (type B, C and D), it is

possible for the defogger and deicer

system to be set to continuous operation

mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for

models with a multi function display, the

setting can be changed using the display.

For details, refer to “Multi function display”

F3-44.

If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level, continuous operation of

the defogger and deicer system is can-

celed and the system stops operating.

CAUTION

.To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

.Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface

of the rear window. They may

damage the conductors printed

on the window.

NOTE

.Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

.If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

.While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode:

–If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

–CONTINUED –

3-117

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

minutes, the windshield wiper dei-

cer stops operating. However, the

rear window defogger and outside

mirror defogger maintain continu-

ous operation.

–If the battery voltage drops below

the permissible level, the defogger

and deicer system stops operating.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

.Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in

personal injury.

.If the lever cannot be raised to

the fixed position, adjust the

steering wheel again. It is dan-

gerous to drive without locking

the steering wheel. This may

cause loss of vehicle control

and result in personal injury.

1) Tilt adjustment

2) Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to

“Front seats”F1-2.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

3-118

Horn

1) Horn mark

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Heated Steering Wheel sys-

tem (if equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system

warms the steering wheel at a constant

temperature.

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel

switch when the ignition switch is in the

“ON”position. Then the steering wheel will

be warmed and the indicator light on the

switch will illuminate.

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch

2) Indicator light

3) Heated area

To turn off the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the switch again. Then the

indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION

.Use the Heated Steering Wheel

system with the engine running.

Otherwise, the battery voltage

may drop below the permissible

level and it may not be possible

to start the engine.

.There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

turesiftheyusetheHeated

Steering Wheel for a long period

of time. When using the Heated

Steering Wheel, always be sure

to warn the persons concerned.

.Do not cover the Heated Steering

Wheel with an object such as a

steering wheel cover. Doing so

may cause the Heated Steering

Wheel to overheat.

NOTE

.If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately above

1048F (408C) when the Heated Steering

Wheel system is turned on, the system

will not heat the steering wheel. Then,

the indicator light will continue to

illuminate.

.The Heated Steering Wheel system

Instruments and controls/Horn

–CONTINUED –

3-119

Instruments and controls/Heated Steering Wheel system

will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 30 minutes after the Heated

Steering Wheel system has been

turned on.

3-120

Ventilator control................................................. 4-2

Center and side ventilators.................................. 4-2

Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3

Type A ................................................................ 4-3

Type B ................................................................ 4-4

Type C ................................................................ 4-5

Type D ................................................................ 4-6

Automatic climate control operation (type

B, C and D) ....................................................... 4-7

Type B ................................................................ 4-7

Type C and D ...................................................... 4-7

Sensors .............................................................. 4-8

Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-8

Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-8

Temperature control ............................................ 4-9

Fan speed control .............................................. 4-10

Air conditioner control ....................................... 4-10

Air inlet selection ............................................... 4-10

Defrosting........................................................... 4-11

Type A and B..................................................... 4-11

Type C............................................................... 4-11

Type D............................................................... 4-11

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ...................................................... 4-12

Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-12

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 4-12

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit.............................................................. 4-12

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season ............................................................ 4-12

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine

is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12

Air filtration system ........................................... 4-13

Replacing the cabin air filter .............................. 4-13

Climate control

Climate control/Ventilator control

Ventilator control

&Center and side ventilators

Center ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

To open or close the ventilator, turn the

thumb-wheel up or down.

4-2

Climate control panel

&Type A

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-

perature control”F4-9.)

2) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control”F4-10.)

3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control”F4-10.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection”F4-10.)

5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection”F4-8.)

6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer”F3-116.)

Climate control/Climate control panel

–CONTINUED –

4-3

Climate control/Climate control panel

&Type B 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C

and D)”F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-

trol”F4-9.)

2) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control”F4-10.)

3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C

and D)”F4-7 and/or “Fan speed control”

F4-10.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection”F4-10.)

5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Automatic climate control operation

(type B, C and D)”F4-7 and/or “Airflow

mode selection”F4-8.)

6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer”F3-116.)

NOTE

The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

4-4

&Type C 1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection”F4-8.)

2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode

selection”F4-8.)

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer”F3-116.)

4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control”F4-10.)

5) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control”F4-10.)

6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection”F4-10.)

7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C

and D)”F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-

trol”F4-9.)

8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation (type B, C and D)”

F4-7.)

9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate

control operation (type B, C and D)”F4-

7.)

Climate control/Climate control panel

–CONTINUED –

4-5

Climate control/Climate control panel

&Type D 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C

and D)”F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-

trol”F4-9.)

2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode

selection”F4-8.)

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer”F3-116.)

4) DUAL mode button (Refer to ““DUAL”

mode (type D)”F4-10.)

5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control”F4-10.)

6) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control”F4-10.)

7) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection”F4-10.)

8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection”F4-8.)

9) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C

and D)”F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-

trol”F4-9.)

10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation (type B, C and D)”

F4-7.)

11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate

control operation (type B, C and D)”F4-

7.)

4-6

Automatic climate control

operation (type B, C and D)

When this mode is selected, the fan

speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control,

and air conditioner compressor operation

are automatically controlled. To activate

this mode, perform the following.

NOTE

.Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

.Even when cooling is not necessary,

setting the temperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C”indi-

cator light on the control panel illumi-

nates.

&Type B

1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial

and fan speed control dial to the “AUTO”

position.

2. Set the preferred temperature using

the temperature control dial.

NOTE

.Each function can be individually

set to the AUTO mode independently of

the other functions. Any function set to

the AUTO mode is controlled automa-

tically. Any function not set to the

AUTO mode can be manually adjusted

as desired.

.The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

3. To turn off the climate control system,

turn the fan speed control dial to the “OFF”

position. Then the air inlet selection will be

set as follows.

.when the AUTO mode is selected: OFF

(outside air)

.when the AUTO mode is not selected:

the mode that was selected when turning

off the climate system will be selected.

&Type C and D

1. Depress the “AUTO”button. The

indicator light “FULL AUTO”on the display

illuminates.

2. Set the preferred temperature using

the temperature control dial.

NOTE

.The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

.During FULL AUTO mode operation,

a small amount of air may flow from the

foot outlets when ventilation mode is

displayed.

.If you operate any of the buttons on

the control panel other than the “OFF”

button, rear window defogger button

and temperature control dial(s) during

FULL AUTO mode operation, the

“FULL”indicator light on the control

panel will turn off and the “AUTO”

indicator light will remain illuminated.

You can then manually control the

system as desired using the button

you operated. To change the system

back to the FULL AUTO mode, press

the “AUTO”button.

3. To turn off the climate control system,

press the “OFF”button. Then the air inlet

selection will be set to OFF (outside air).

Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D)

–CONTINUED –

4-7

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

&Sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are not treated

properly and become damaged, the sys-

tem may not be able to control the interior

temperature correctly. To avoid damaging

the sensors, observe the following pre-

cautions.

–Do not subject the sensors to impact.

–Keep water away from the sensors.

–Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows.

–Solar sensor: beside the windshield

defroster grille

–Interior air temperature sensor: next to

the steering column

–Outside temperature sensor: near the

front bumper opening

Manual climate control op-

eration

&Airflow mode selection

To select the airflow mode:

Type A, B and C: Turn the airflow mode

selection dial.

Type D: Press the airflow mode selection

button.

To select the defrost mode:

Type A and B: Turn the airflow mode

selection dial.

Type C and D: Press the defroster button.

Airflow modes are as follows.

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

4-8

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of

the instrument panel and some through

windshield defroster outlets (A small

amount of air flows to the windshield and

both side windows to prevent fogging.)

(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”

F4-11.)

(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets

and both side outlets of the instrument

panel (Refer to “Defrosting”F4-11.)

&Temperature control

!Type A

Turn the temperature control dial over a

range from the blue side (cool) to red side

(warm) to regulate the temperature of

airflow from the air outlets.

!Type B, C and D

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred interior temperature. With the

dial set to your preferred temperature, the

system automatically adjusts the tempera-

ture of air supplied from the outlets so that

the preferred temperature is achieved and

maintained.

If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,

the system provides maximum cooling

performance. If the dial is turned fully

clockwise, the system provides maximum

heating performance.

NOTE

The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

–CONTINUED –

4-9

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

!“DUAL”mode (type D)

a) Driver’s side temperature

b) Front passenger’s side temperature

You can change the setting of the driver’s

side and front passenger’s side tempera-

ture independently by selecting the

“DUAL”mode.

You can select the “DUAL”mode by

performing either of the following proce-

dures.

.Press the “DUAL”button

.Turn the passenger’s side temperature

control dial

The “DUAL”mode can be canceled by

pressing the “DUAL”button.

When the “DUAL”mode is canceled, only

the driver’s side temperature is displayed.

When the “DUAL”mode is selected:

Turn the driver’s side dial to set the

driver’s side temperature. Turn the front

passenger’s side dial to set the front

passenger’s side temperature.

When the “DUAL”mode is canceled:

Set the desired temperature by turning the

driver’s side dial.

&Fan speed control

The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON”position. Select the

preferred fan speed by turning the fan

speed control dial.

&Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Press the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is

on, the “A/C”indicator light illuminates.

To turn off the air conditioner, press the

button again.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approxi-

mately 328F(08C), the air conditioner

compressor will stop operating.

&Air inlet selection

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

ON position (recirculation): Interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road.

OFF position (outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Press the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside conditions are no longer

dusty.

NOTE

.When the indicator light on the air

inlet selection button is flashing at

engine starting, a malfunction might

be occurring in the electrical system.

4-10

Contact your SUBARU dealer for in-

spection.

.The indicator light on the air inlet

selection button may flash in the

following cases. However, this does

not indicate a malfunction.

–After the vehicle battery has been

disconnected and reconnected.

–When the vehicle battery voltage

is low.

Defrosting

&Type A and B

Select the “ ” or “ ” mode by turning the

airflow mode selection dial to defrost or to

dehumidify the windshield and front door

windows.

&Type C

Select the “ ” mode by pressing the

defroster button, or select the “”mode

by turning the airflow mode selection dial

to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows.

&Type D

Select the “ ” mode by pressing the

defroster button, or select the “”mode

by pressing the airflow mode selection

button to defrost or to dehumidify the

windshield and front door windows.

NOTE

.When the “ ” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner compres-

sor operates automatically regardless

of the position of the air conditioner

button to defrost the windshield more

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not illumi-

nate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the

outside air mode.

For type A climate control system, in

this state:

–You cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the

air conditioner button.

–You cannot select the recircula-

tion mode by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

.For type C and D climate control

system, after defrosting the windshield

by pressing the defroster button “”,

pressing the button again returns the

system to the setting that had been

selected before the defroster was acti-

vated.

Climate control/Defrosting 4-11

Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

&Cleaning ventilation grille

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

&Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

&Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

&Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

&Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

&Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving up a steep

incline.

&Refrigerant for your climate

control system

1) Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

4-12

refrigerant HFC134a (as shown on the air

conditioner label). Therefore, the method

of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method

for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the air filter element according

to the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty conditions, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. Have

the filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use

only a genuine SUBARU cabin filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

.Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

.Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

&Replacing the cabin air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take mea-

sures to protect the center console

with masking tape first, so that you

avoid scratching the center console

with the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system

–CONTINUED –

4-13

Climate control/Air filtration system

1) Stopper

(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then

pull down the glove box as far as it will

go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage

the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according

to the following procedure in order to

prevent dust on the cabin air filter from

falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Push in the four stoppers to

unlock, and then slowly pull out the

cabin air filter 4 in (10 cm) from the

housing.

(2) Completely pull out the cabin air

filter by gently tilting the front side of

the cabin air filter downward.

3. Replace the cabin air filter element

with a new one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

4-14

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system 4-15

————————————————————————————————————————

Antenna................................................................ 5-2

Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2

Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ......................... 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-3

Base display audio set (if equipped) .................... 5-4

STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set

(U.S. spec. models only, if equipped) ................. 5-6

Tips for operating the audio/visual system ........... 5-7

Basic information before use .............................. 5-15

Basic operation.................................................. 5-18

Unit settings ...................................................... 5-19

SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) ....................... 5-26

AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-28

SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if equipped) ................. 5-37

aha

by HARMAN ............................................. 5-44

Pandora

(if equipped) ....................................... 5-50

CD ..................................................................... 5-53

USB memory...................................................... 5-55

iPod................................................................... 5-56

Bluetooth audio.................................................. 5-58

AUX................................................................... 5-61

Steering switches for audio .............................. 5-63

Bluetooth

settings ............................................ 5-66

Regulatory information ....................................... 5-66

Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device .......... 5-66

Setting Bluetooth details .................................... 5-69

Hands-free phone system ................................. 5-71

Control screen................................................... 5-72

Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone ......... 5-73

Using the phone switch/microphone................... 5-73

How to change the hands-free phone system ..... 5-73

Making a call ..................................................... 5-74

Receiving a call ................................................. 5-77

Talking on the phone ......................................... 5-78

Phone settings .................................................. 5-79

Voice command system .................................... 5-81

Using the voice command system...................... 5-82

Voice command system operation ...................... 5-83

Command list .................................................... 5-85

What to do if....................................................... 5-89

Troubleshooting................................................. 5-89

Appendix ............................................................ 5-93

Certification....................................................... 5-93

Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-93

Certification for Mexico models .......................... 5-94

Audio

Audio/Antenna

Antenna

&Roof antenna

CAUTION

.Be sure to remove the antenna

rod before entering garages,

parking towers and other loca-

tions with low ceilings.

.Remove the antenna rod before

washing your car at a car wash. If

the antenna rod is left attached, it

may scratch the roof.

.When reinstalling the removed

antenna rod, be sure to fully

tighten it.

1) Unscrew

2) Remove

The roof antenna is installed in the center

at the rear part of the roof.

The antenna rod can be removed by

unscrewing it from its base.

&Roof antenna (for Shark fin

type)

The SUBARU STARLINK antenna is

installed in the center of the roof at the

rear.

5-2

Audio set

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

CAUTION

.Always consult your SUBARU

dealer before installing a citizen

band radio or other transmitting

device in your vehicle. Such

devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if

they are incorrectly installed or if

they are not suited for the vehi-

cle.

.To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the

audio/visual system on when

the engine is not running.

NOTE

.If a cell phone is placed near the

audio set, it may cause the audio set to

emit noise when the phone receives

calls. This noise does not indicate an

audio set malfunction. Note that a cell

phone should not be placed near the

audio set.

.Some functions may not be avail-

able depending on the market and

specifications of your vehicle.

.The images shown in this Owner’s

Manual are sample images. The actual

images may vary depending on the

market and specifications of your ve-

hicle.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-3

Audio/Audio set

&Base display audio set (if equipped)

1) Power/VOLUME knob

2) Eject button

3) AUDIO/TUNE knob

4) HOME button

5) APPS button

6) Display

7) SEEK/TRACK buttons

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC”or “ON”

position.

.Power and audio controls: refer to

“Basic operation”F5-18.

.SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped):

refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”F5-26.

.Radio operation: refer to “AM/FM radio”

F5-28.

.Satellite radio operation (if equipped):

refer to “SiriusXM Satellite Radio”F5-37.

.aha

: refer to “aha

by HARMAN”

F5-44.

.Pandora

(if equipped): refer to “Pan-

dora

”F5-50.

.CD (compact disc) player operation:

refer to “CD”F5-53.

.USB storage device: refer to “USB

memory”F5-55.

.iPod operation: refer to “iPod”F5-56.

.Bluetooth

audio: refer to “Bluetooth

audio”F5-58.

.Auxiliary input jack: refer to “AUX”F5-

61.

.Hands-free phone system: refer to

“Hands-free phone system”F5-71.

5-4

NOTE

HD Radio

Technology (if equipped)

should be included as a feature in the

base display audio set.

This display audio set is referred to as

follows.

.U.S. customers: STARLINK

6.2 Mul-

timedia

.Canadian customers: 6.2-inch infotain-

ment system

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-5

Audio/Audio set

&STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec. models

only, if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC”or “ON”

position.

For details about how to use the

STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio

set, refer to the STARLINK

7.0 Multi-

media Plus or STARLINK

7.0 Multi-

media Navigation Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

HD Radio Technology should be in-

cluded as a feature in the STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set.

5-6

&Tips for operating the audio/

visual system

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the audio/visual

system:

.Be careful not to spill beverages

over the audio/visual system.

.Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc

slot.

NOTE

The use of a cell phone inside or near

the vehicle may cause a noise from the

speakers of the audio/visual system

which you are listening to. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

!Radio

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with the

radio —it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or phone wires can interfere with AM

signals. And of course, radio signals have

a limited range. The farther the vehicle is

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as the vehicle moves.

Here, some common reception problems

that probably do not indicate a problem

with the radio are described.

!FM

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40

km). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by

distortion.

Multi-path: FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for 2 signals to reach

the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If

this happens, the signals will cancel each

other out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering: These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping: If the FM signal being

listened to is interrupted or weakened, and

there is another strong station nearby on

the FM band, the radio may tune in the

second station until the original signal can

be picked up again.

!AM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere —especially at

night. These reflected signals can inter-

fere with those received directly from the

radio station, causing the radio station to

sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interference: When a reflected

signal and a signal received directly from

a radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static: AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening or electrical

motors. This results in static.

!SiriusXM (if equipped)

.Cargo loaded on the roof luggage

carrier, especially metal objects, may

adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM

Satellite Radio.

.Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization may in-

validate the user’s right to operate the

equipment.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-7

Audio/Audio set

!CD player and disc

.This CD player is intended for use with

4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.

.Extremely high temperatures can keep

the CD player from working. On hot days,

use the air conditioning system to cool the

inside of the vehicle before using the

player.

.Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

make the CD player skip.

.If moisture gets into the CD player, the

discs may not be able to be played.

Remove the discs from the player and

wait until it dries.

WARNING

CD players use an invisible laser

beam which could cause hazardous

radiation exposure if directed out-

side the unit. Be sure to operate the

player correctly.

Audio CDs

.Use only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your player:

–SACD

–dts CD

–Copy-protected CD

–Video CD Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

5-8

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

CAUTION

.Do not use special shaped, trans-

parent/translucent, low quality or

labeled discs such as those

shown in the illustrations. The

use of such discs may damage

the player, or it may be impossi-

ble to eject the disc.

.This system is not designed for

use of Dual Discs. Do not use

Dual Discs because they may

cause damage to the player.

.Do not use discs with a protec-

tion ring. The use of such discs

may damage the player, or it may

be impossible to eject the disc.

.Do not use printable discs. The

use of such discs may damage

the player, or it may be impossi-

ble to eject the disc.

1) Correct

2) Wrong

.Handle discs carefully, especially when

inserting them. Hold them on the edge and

do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-

prints on them, particularly on the shiny

side.

.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or

other disc damage could cause the player

to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To

see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the

light.)

.Remove discs from the players when

not in use. Store them in their plastic

cases away from moisture, heat and direct

sunlight.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-9

Audio/Audio set

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-

free cloth that has been dampened with

water. Wipe in a straight line from the

center to the edge of the disc (not in

circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free

cloth. Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or anti-static device.

!CD-R/RW discs

.CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process”(a

process that allows discs to be played

on a conventional CD player) cannot be

played.

.It may not be possible to play CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD

recorder or a personal computer because

of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on

the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the

lens of the unit.

.It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-

ing on the application settings and the

environment. Record with the correct

format. (For details, contact the appropri-

ate application manufacturers of the ap-

plications.)

.CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-

peratures or other storage conditions. The

unit may be unable to play some damaged

discs.

.If you insert a CD-RW disc into the

player, playback will begin more slowly

than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.

.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be played using the DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

!USB memory device

.USB communication formats: USB

1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

.File formats: FAT 16/32

.Correspondence class: Mass storage

class

!iPod

The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod

classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices

can be used with this system.

Made for

.iPod touch (5th generation)*

.iPod touch (4th generation)

.iPod touch (3rd generation)

.iPod touch (2nd generation)

.iPod touch (1st generation)

.iPod classic

.iPod nano (7th generation)*

.iPod nano (6th generation)*

.iPod nano (5th generation)

.iPod nano (4th generation)

.iPod nano (3rd generation)

.iPod nano (2nd generation)*

.iPod nano (1st generation)*

.iPhone 5s*

.iPhone 5c*

.iPhone 5*

.iPhone 4s

.iPhone 4

.iPhone 3GS

.iPhone 3G

.iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

Depending on differences between mod-

els or software versions etc., some mod-

els might be incompatible with this sys-

tem.

5-10

!File information

Compatible compressed files (Audio)

Item USB DISC

Compatible

file format MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in the

device

Maximum

512

Maximum

255

Files in the

device

Maximum

8000

Maximum

512

Files per

folder

Maximum

255 —

Corresponding sampling frequency

(Audio)

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24

WMA files:

Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)

32/48/64/80/96/128/

160/192

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

48/44.1/32/24/22.05/

16/12/11.025/8

Corresponding bit rates (Audio)

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:

Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR 32 - 192

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC 16 - 320

(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)

.MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA

(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad-

vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres-

sion standards.

.This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC

files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem-

ory, and Bluetooth device.

.This system can play disc recordings

compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level

2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

.When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,

add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/

.wma/.m4a).

.This system plays back files with .mp3/

.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/

AAC files respectively. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropriate

file extension.

.This system can play only the first

session when using multi-session compa-

tible CDs.

.MP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3

formats. This system cannot display disc

titles, track titles and artist names in other

formats.

.WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/

AAC tag that is used in the same way as

an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-

tion such as track title and artist name.

.The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at

32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

.This system can play back AAC files

encoded by iTunes.

.The sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit rates. In

order to achieve a reasonable level of

sound quality, discs recorded with a bit

rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-

mended.

.The MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded

using packet write data transfer (UDF

format). Discs should be recorded using

“pre-mastering”software rather than pack-

etwrite software.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-11

Audio/Audio set

.M3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio device.

.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audio

device.

.The player is compatible with VBR

(Variable Bit Rate).

.When playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time

will not be correctly displayed if the fast

forward or reverse operations are used.

.It is not possible to check folders that

do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.

.MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8

levels deep can be played. However, the

start of playback may be delayed when

using discs containing numerous levels of

folders. For this reason, we recommend

creating discs with no more than 2 levels

of folders.

.The play order of the compact disc with

the structure shown above is as follows:

.The order changes depending on the

personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC

encoding software you use.

!Terms

!Packet write

.This is a general term that describes

the process of writing data on-demand to

CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is

written to floppy or hard discs.

!ID3 tag

.This is a method of embedding track-

related information in an MP3 file. This

embedded information can include the

track number, track title, the artist’s name,

the album title, the music genre, the year

of production, comments, cover art and

other data. The contents can be freely

edited using software with ID3 tag editing

functions. Although the tags are restricted

to a number of characters, the information

can be viewed when the track is played

back.

!WMA tag

.WMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information such as track

title and artist name.

!ISO 9660 format

.This is the international standard for

the formatting of CD-ROM folders and

files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2

levels of regulations.

.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format

(8 character file names, with a 3 character

file extension. File names must be com-

posed of one-byte capital letters and

numbers. The “_”symbol may also be

included.)

5-12

.Level 2: The file name can have up to

31 characters (including the separation

mark “.”and file extension). Each folder

must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

!MP3

.MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to

about 1/10 the size of that on conventional

discs.

!WMA

.WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an

audio compression format developed by

Microsoft

. It compresses files into a size

smaller than that of MP3 files. The

decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.

7, 8 and 9.

.This product is protected by certain

intellectual property rights of Microsoft

Corporation and third parties. Use or

distribution of such technology outside of

this product is prohibited without a license

from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft

subsidiary and third parties.

!AAC

.AAC is short for Advanced Audio

Coding and refers to an audio compres-

sion technology standard used with

MPEG2 and MPEG4.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-13

Audio/Audio set

!Error messages

Mode Message Explanation

“Disc read error.”

.This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the disc.

.This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside

down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc which is

not playable is inserted.

“Please eject disc.”There is a trouble inside the system.

Eject the disc.

USB

“Media not connected. Press AUDIO/TUNE knob

to exit.”

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. Refer to

“Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device”F5-17.

“No audio file.”This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB

memory.

“Unplayable file”This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.

iPod

“Media not connected”This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not connected to the system.

“No audio file”This indicates that there is no audio file in the connected iPod.

“Unplayable file”This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.

NOTE

If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

5-14

&Basic information before use

WARNING

When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running, always apply the

parking brake for safety. Failure to

do so may result in loss of control of

your vehicle and cause an accident

or serious injury.

CAUTION

.To prevent damaging the screen,

touch the screen keys with your

finger lightly.

.Wipe off fingerprints using a

glass cleaning cloth. Do not use

chemical cleaners to clean the

screen, as they may damage the

touch screen.

!Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.

Operation method Outline Main use

Touch

Quickly touch and release

once.

Changing and selecting various

settings

Drag*

Touch the screen with your

finger, and move the screen

to the desired position.

Scrolling the lists

Flick*

Quickly move the screen by

flicking with your finger.

Scrolling the main screen page

*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

NOTE

There may be a delayed response to flick operation that are performed at high

altitudes.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-15

Audio/Audio set

!Touch screen operation

This system is operated mainly by the

keys on the screen.

When a screen key is touched, a beep

sounds. You can set the beep sound.

Refer to “Unit settings”F5-19.

NOTE

.If the system does not respond to

touching a screen key, move your

finger away from the screen and touch

it again.

.Grayed-out screen keys cannot be

operated.

.The displayed image may become

darkerandmovingimagesmaybe

slightly distorted when the screen is

cold.

.In extremely cold conditions, the

screen may not be displayed correctly.

Also, the screen keys may be less

responsive than usual when pressed.

.When you look at the screen

through polarized material such as

polarized sunglasses, the screen may

be dark and difficult to see. If so, look at

the screen from different angles, adjust

the screen settings or take off your

sunglasses. Refer to “Unit settings”

F5-19.

!Entering letters and numbers/list

screen operation

!Entering letters and numbers

When entering the Bluetooth device name

or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters

and numbers can be entered via the

screen.

Enter letters (example: In-Car-Device

setting)

No. Function

1Enter the desired characters (alpha-

bet key mode).

2Switch to the screen for characters.

3Enter a space.

4Confirm the characters/numbers en-

tered into the window.

No. Function

5Delete a character/number entered

into the window.

!List screen

Multimedia playlists (example: iPod play-

list)

No. Function

1Select a category that wants to play

back.

2Return to the playback display of

each mode.

3Select to skip to the next or previous

page.

5-16

!Initial screen

When the ignition switch is in the “ACC”or

“ON”position, the initial screen will be

displayed and the system will begin

operating.

.When using the SUBARU STARLINK

function (if equipped), the display screen

may be different from the screen above.

.After a few seconds, the caution screen

will be displayed.

.After about 5 seconds, the caution

screen automatically switches to the next

screen.

!Connecting and disconnecting a

USB memory/portable device

The USB port and the AUX jack are

located as shown in the following illustra-

tion.

NOTE

.This unit does not support commer-

cially available USB hubs.

.Turn on the power of the device

when it is not turned on.

.This device has a USB port for USB

memory/portable device.

.For compatible USB memory de-

vices, refer to “USB memory device”

F5-10.

.For compatible iPod models, refer to

“iPod”F5-10.

.Even if a USB hub is used to

connect more than two USB devices,

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-17

Audio/Audio set

only the first two connected devices

will be recognized.

&Basic operation

This section describes some of the basic

features of the audio/visual system. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio/visual system works when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”or

“ON”position.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the audio/

visual system on longer than neces-

sary when the engine is not running.

NOTE

Some functions can also be operated

by using the voice command system.

For details, refer to “Voice command

system”F5-81.

!Turning the system on and off

Press the power/VOLUME knob to turn

the audio/visual system on and off. When

the system turns on, the mode that was in

use the last time the system was turned off

will be displayed. Press and hold the knob

to turn the display off.

Turn this knob to adjust the volume.

!Selecting an audio source

1. Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.

2. Select the desired source.

Example: Source select screen

5-18

NOTE

.If the audio control screen appears,

select the “Source”key on the audio

screen or press the AUDIO/TUNE knob

again.

.When you push the AUDIO/TUNE

knob while any screen other than the

audio control screen is displayed, the

display will return to the audio control

screen.

.When the AUDIO/TUNE knob is

pushed and held, the graphic equalizer

screen will be displayed. Refer to

““Graphic Equalizer”” F5-23.

!Selecting a function menu

Press the HOME button to display home

screen.

Item Function

AUDIO

Select to display the main

screen of the audio source that

was selected previously.

PHONE

Select to display the hands-free

function using your cell phone.

Refer to “Hands-free phone

system”F5-71.

APPS

Select to display the functions

linked with a smartphone. Refer

to “SUBARU STARLINK”F5-

26.

SETTINGS

Select to display the functions

for performing various settings.

Refer to “Unit settings”F5-19.

&Unit settings

Sound quality adjustment, screen adjust-

ment, and information of the audio unit are

displayed.

1. Press the HOME button on the audio

panel.

2. Touch the “SETTINGS”key.

3. Select the items to be set.

Available setting:

.General settings: Select the tab to

check the system software update infor-

mation. Refer to “General settings”F5-20.

.Bluetooth settings: Select the tab to

set the Bluetooth settings. Refer to “Blue-

tooth settings”F5-20.

.Sound settings: Select the tab to set

the sound quality settings. Refer to

“Sound settings”F5-20.

.Display settings: Select the tab to

set the screen settings. Refer to “Display

settings”F5-25.

.SUBARU STARLINK settings (if

equipped): Select to the tab to set the

SUBARU STARLINK settings. Refer to

“SUBARU STARLINK settings”F5-26.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-19

Audio/Audio set

!General settings

Touch the tab for the audio unit basic

settings.

Item Function

System

Language Select to change the language.

Button

Beeps

Select to set the sound beeps

on/off.

System

Software Select to update software ver-

sions. This menu is not used in

usual operations.

Reset to

Factory

Setting

Select to reset the device to

factory settings. This menu is not

used in usual operations.

After resetting to factory settings,

turn ignition off and on again.

!Bluetooth settings

Touch the tab to set Bluetooth.

Item Function

BT De-

vices Con-

nection

Select to pair/connect the Blue-

tooth devices.

In-Car-De-

vice setting

Select to enter the Bluetooth

device name or PIN-code.

For details, refer to “Bluetooth

settings”

F5-66.

!Sound settings

Touch the tab to set the sound quality.

Item Function

Balance/

Fader

Select to adjust speaker volume

balance (right/left and front/rear).

Speed Vo-

lume Con-

trol

Select to adjust speaker volume

coupled to vehicle speed.

Graphic

Equalizer Select to adjust sound quality in

each frequency band.

Sound Re-

storer Select to add high-pitched tone

to the compressed audio file.

Volume

Smoother

Select to adjust volume differ-

ence between audio sources.

Virtual

Bass

Select to add harmonic tone so

that low-pitched tone is

strengthened.

5-20

Item Function

Vocal Im-

age Con-

trol

Select to pick-up vocal sound

signal from the sound data, and

adjust it to right/left or front/rear.

Refer to the following table for the adjustment range of each audio setting item and

default value.

Item Step Default

Balance/

Fader Volume

Balance

Control

Balance L9-R9 0 (Center)

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Vocal

Image

Control

Balance L9-R9 R3

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low

Graphic Equalizer −6-+6 0 (Flat)

Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON

Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid

Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-21

Audio/Audio set

!“Balance/Fader”

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is important for good quality audio

program listening.

Keep in mind that when listening to a

stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the

volume of 1 group of sounds while

decreasing the volume of another.

Touch the “Set”key of the “Balance/Fader”

key. The “Balance/Fader”screen will

appear.

.Volume Balance setting

1. Select the “Volume Balance Control”

key.

2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or

“”key.

3. Adjust the fader by pressing “”or

“”key.

.Vocal image setting

1. Select the “Vocal Image Control”key.

2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or

“”key.

3. Adjust the fader by pressing “”or

“”key.

5-22

!“Speed Volume Control”

The system adjusts to the optimum

volume and tone quality according to

vehicle speed to compensate for in-

creased vehicle noise.

1. Touch the right side key of the “Speed

Volume Control”key.

2. Select the desired item. The “High”

key comes to have a bigger effect. When

the “OFF”key is selected, speed volume

control function is cancelled.

!“Graphic Equalizer”

You can adjust the sound quality by

increasing/decreasing the gain for each

frequency range.

1. Touch the “Set”key of the “Graphic

Equalizer”key.

2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer

patterns (the “Bass”,“Treble”,“Acoustic”,

“Impact”,“Smooth”and “Flat”key) and 3

customized patterns (the “SET 1”-“SET

3”key) are available.

3. When customizing the equalizer pat-

tern, touch among “SET 1”,“SET 2”or

“SET 3”and then touch the “Adjust”key.

4. Adjust the level of each frequency

band by touching “”or “ ” key.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-23

Audio/Audio set

!“Sound Restorer”

You can play compressed audio data with

a sound quality that is close to the original

sound.

Select the “ON”or “OFF”key by the right

side key of the “Sound Restorer”key.

!“Volume Smoother”

This function reduces the difference in

volume among the sound sources to be

played.

1. Touch the right side key of the “Volume

Smoother”key.

2. Select the “OFF”,“Low”,“Mid”or

“High”key. The “High”key comes to have

a bigger effect. When the “OFF”key is

selected, the volume smoother function is

cancelled.

!“Virtual Bass”

This function enables you to adjust the

bass tone.

1. Touch the right side key of the “Virtual

Bass”key.

2. Select the “OFF”,“Low”,“Mid”or

“High”key. The “High”key comes to have

a bigger effect. When the “OFF”key is

selected, the virtual bass function is

cancelled.

!“Vocal Image Control”

Refer to ““Balance/Fader”” F5-22.

5-24

!Display settings

Touch the tab to set display.

Item Function

Day/Night

Mode The “Auto”,“Day”or “Night”key

can be selected on the pop-up

screen.

When the “Auto”key is selected,

the screen changes to day or

night mode depending on the

position of the headlight switch.

Brightness Touch “+”or “−”to adjust the

brightness.

NOTE

.When the screen is viewed through

polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat-

tern may appear on the screen due to

optical characteristics of the screen. If

this is disruptive, please operate the

screen without polarized sunglasses.

.If the screen is set to “Day”mode

with the headlight switch turned on,

this condition is memorized even with

the engine turned off.

!How to adjust the rear view

image

In the camera display, the brightness, tint,

color and black level of the screen can be

adjusted.

1. Depress the brake pedal fully and stop

the vehicle.

2. While the vehicle is stopped, set the

shift lever (MT models) or select lever

(CVT models) in the “R”position, and then

touch the display.

3. Touch the “Display Adjustment”key.

4. Touch the items to adjust the rear

camera screen.

Camera display

WARNING

When adjusting camera display

screen, make sure to depress the

brake pedal fully to avoid the vehicle

from moving. Failure to do so may

lead to a serious accident.

NOTE

The camera display can be accessed

when the rear camera monitor is dis-

played.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-25

Audio/Audio set

!SUBARU STARLINK settings (if

equipped)

Touch the tab to change the SUBARU

STARLINK settings.

Item Function

Browser

cache Select to initialize cache files

that the browser stores. If the

confirmation screen appears

and the “OK”key is selected, the

cache files will be deleted.

&SUBARU STARLINK (if

equipped)

The SUBARU STARLINK function allows

the system to link with a smartphone using

Bluetooth.

!How to use SUBARU STARLINK

1. Connect to the audio system. Use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

.For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-

ing and disconnecting a USB memory/

portable device”F5-17.

.For details about registering or con-

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device”F5-66.

2. Press the HOME button, and then

touch the “APPS”key, or press the APPS

button on the audio panel. The APPS

screen is displayed.

3. Touch the “SUBARU STARLINK”key

on the APPS screen. The disclaimer

screen or the error screen is displayed.

4. Touch the “Check”key on the disclai-

mer screen and then the APPS main

screen will appear. If you touch the

“Cancel”key, the disclaimer screen dis-

appears and the previous screen will be

displayed again.

NOTE

.The SUBARU STARLINK connection

error screen will be displayed due to

one of the following possible reasons.

–Your smartphone and the system

have not been connected via USB

(for iPhone) or Bluetooth (for An-

droid).

–SUBARU STARLINK APPS has

5-26

not been activated.

.You can also switch to aha or

Pandora (if equipped) from the APPS

screen.

!APPS main screen

No. Function

1Select to go to the Music APPS

screen.

2Select to go to the News APPS

screen.

3Select to go to the Calender APPS

screen.

4Select to go to the iHeartRadio

APPS screen.

5Select to go to the Weather APPS

screen.

NOTE

.The error screen will be displayed

while using SUBARU STARLINK due to

one of the following possible reasons.

–When your smartphone has no

service or the Bluetooth communi-

cation is not possible.

–When your smartphone is turned

off.

–When the SUBARU STARLINK

APPS is turned off.

–When connection to the SUBARU

STARLINK server is not possible.

–When a problem occurs other

than a server error.

.When using the SUBARU STARLINK

function, a disclaimer screen will be

displayed. Be sure to fully read the

contents before using the function.

.Supported devices

–iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/

iPhone 5 (iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)/

iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s

–Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-27

Audio/Audio set

&AM/FM radio

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

2Select to change the band.

The HD Radio indicator on the top

right of the screen changes accord-

ing to the reception condition of HD

Radio (if equipped).

Select to display a station list (if

equipped). Refer to “Selecting a

station from the list”F5-29.

No. Function

Select to scan radio channels.

This function enables searching for

receivable stations automatically,

and tunes in to a frequency for 5

seconds if a station is found. When

the 5-second period has elapsed, the

system searches for the next recei-

vable station again, and tunes in to

the frequency for 5 seconds.

6Select to open the “Option”screen.

Refer to “Radio settings”F5-30.

When you touch a key, the system

tunes to the stored frequency.

When you touch and hold a key, the

system stores the frequency to the

selected preset channel. Refer to

“Presetting a station”F5-29.

No. Function

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Turn to step up/down frequencies.

Turn to move up/down the list. Also,

the knob can be used to enter

selections on the list screens by

pressing.

Press to select an audio mode. For

details, refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-

19.

11 Press to seek for a station/channel.

Press and hold for continuous seek.

NOTE

.Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the sur-

rounding area, atmospheric conditions,

station strength and transmitter dis-

tance. Buildings or other obstructions

may cause momentary static, flutter or

station interference. If reception con-

tinues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a

stronger station.

.The radio automatically changes to

stereo reception when a stereo broad-

cast is received.

5-28

.The radio automatically blends to an

HD Radio signal (if equipped) in AM or

FM where available.

!How to change the source

Select the “AM”or “FM”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

!Presetting a station

In total 18 stations can be set for the FM

band (6 each for FM1, FM2 and FM3) and

12 stations can be set for the AM band (6

each for AM1 and AM2).

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. If you touch and hold a key, the system

stores the frequency to the selected

preset channel.

!Selecting a station from the list (if

equipped)

A station list can be displayed.

1. Touch the tab.

2. Touch the tab and the station list will

appear.

3. Select the desired station.

!Update the station list

Touch the “Update Station List”key on the

station list screen and the following screen

will be displayed.

Item Function

OK Select to execute the manual

update.

Cancel Select to cancel the manual

update.

NOTE

.The audio system sound is muted

during refresh operation.

.In some situations, it may take some

time to update the station list.

!Bookmark the list

You can store and call up the received

data (images, song titles, artist names,

etc.). The stored data is displayed as a list.

1. Touch the tab on the station list

screen and the following screen will be

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-29

Audio/Audio set

displayed.

2. Select an item from the bookmark list,

the following image will be displayed.

3. When you call up bookmark informa-

tion, a QR code converted from the

bookmark information will be displayed

on the screen. You can access a URL by

reading the QR code using a smartphone,

etc.

!Delete bookmark from the list

1. Touch the “Delete Bookmark”key on

the station list screen and the following

screen will be displayed.

2. If you select an item from the book-

mark list, the item will be deleted from the

bookmark list.

3. Touch the “Delete All”key. If the

confirmation screen appears and the

“OK”key is selected, all bookmark items

in the list will be deleted.

!Radio settings

You can perform various radio settings.

1. Touch the tab.

2. Select the desired item from the

following table.

Item Function

HD (if

equipped) Select to turn HD radio on/off.

PTY Select

(if

equipped)

Select to set the PTY group.

Auto Store

Select to detect 6 radio stations

with strong frequencies automa-

tically and to store them in the

order of frequency.

!About HD Radio

technology (if

equipped)

HD Radio

Technology is the digital

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your

radio product has a special receiver which

allows it to receive digital broadcasts

(where available) in addition to the analog

broadcasts it already receives. Digital

broadcasts have better sound quality than

analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts

provide free, crystal clear audio with no

static or distortion. For more information,

and a guide to available radio stations and

programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

5-30

AM and FM broadcast sound quality is

now crystal clear, with AM sound quality

that virtually matches FM quality of the

past, and FM broadcasts that have near

CD-level sound quality.

HD Radio Technology manufactured un-

der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-

tion. Foreign Patents. HD Radio

and the

HD, HD Radio, and “Arc”logos are

proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

FM stations can provide additional digital-

only audio programming on HD2/HD3

Channels.

!Available HD Radio

technology (if

equipped)

!Multicast

On the FM radio frequency most digital

stations have “multiple”or supplemental

programs on one FM station.

1. Touch the “Sub CH”key on the control

screen and the following screen will be

displayed.

2. The indication that shows whether the

current broadcast is digital or analog is

displayed on the top right of the control

screen.

3. Select the desired channel.

Turning the AUDIO/TUNE knob can also

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-31

Audio/Audio set

select the desired multicast channel.

NOTE

.HD Radio

stations can be preset.

.An orange will be displayed on

the screen when in digital. The will

first appear in a gray color indicating

the station is indeed (an analog or) a

digital station. Once the digital signal is

acquired, the logo will change to a

bright orange color.

.The song title and artist name will

appear on the screen when available by

the radio station. The radio station can

send album pictures when available.

.As a user works through the analog

radio stations, (where applicable) the

radio receiver will automatically tune

from an analog signal to a digital signal

within 5 seconds.

!Preserving a music information

Tag information in the music broadcasting

is preserved in the system and transmits

to an iPod.

1. Touch the “Tag”key in the control

screen while receiving HD Radio, the tag

setting screen will be displayed.

2. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device”F5-17.

.Turn on the power of the iPod if it is

not turned on.

.Once an iPod is connected, the

music tag moves from the radio into

the iPod.

.When the iPod is connected to

iTunes, the tagged information of the

songs which were tagged while listen-

ing to the radio can be viewed. Then a

user may decide to purchase the song

or CD/Album which had been listened

to on their radio.

5-32

In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message Contents

“Tag storage full”If there is not enough memory in the digital

audio

“Already Stored”If the same information is stored in the digital

audio

“Storing Failed”If the store process in the digital audio failed

“iPod full Tags cannot be stored”If there is not enough memory in the iPod

“Starting to transfer the Tag files.”If the system starts to transmit music informa-

tion to an iPod

“Transferring Failed”If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod failed

“X Tag(s) Sent”(X = number of transmitted

information) will be displayed.

If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod is successful

NOTE

.The tag information can not be

preserved while scanning or caching

the radio station.

.If tagging the music information

fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag was

unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio

tag was unsuccessful.)”will be dis-

played on the screen. If this occurs, tag

the information again.

.Program Service Data: Presents song

name, artist, station IDs, and other rele-

vant data streams.

.iTunes Tagging provides you the op-

portunity to discover a wide range of

content and the means to “tag”that

content for later review and purchase from

the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple

Automotive specifications for implement-

ing iTunes Tagging.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-33

Audio/Audio set

.Visual information related to content

being played on your HD Radio receiver,

such as Album Art, historical photographs,

still art from live broadcasts, among other

related content.

5-34

!Troubleshooting guide

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear

a short period of programming replayed or an

echo, stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog and digital volume is

not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame

mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact

the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in and out. Radio is shifting between analog and digital

audio.

Reception issue. May clear-up as the vehicle

continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the

HD Radio

off will change the radio mode to

analog audio.

Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3

multicast channel had been playing.

The radio does not have access to digital

signals at the moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal

returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new

station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/

HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until

HD Radio

broadcast can be decoded and

make the audio available. This takes up to 7

seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to

become available.

Text information does not match the present

song audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio

_station_experiences.

No text information shown for the present

selected frequency. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio

_station_experiences.

The “Acquiring”caution message appears

when the system attempts to acquire digital

transmission.

When acquiring digital data while receiving a

digital broadcast and SPS station.

.When the reception in digital of the SPS station

is confirmed.

.When the system determined that the SPS

station could not be received.

.When the SPS broadcast is ended (stopped) by

the radio station while receiving SPS.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-35

Audio/Audio set

Experience Cause Action

The “HD Channel is unavailable”caution

message appears when digital reception is not

possible.

.When the system determined that the SPS

station could not be received while receiving

a digital broadcast and SPS station.

.When the SPS broadcast is ended

(stopped) by the radio station while receiv-

ing SPS.

.When the status is changed to acquiring digital

data because the reception condition of SPS

station has improved.

.When the received station is changed.

5-36

&SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if

equipped)

!SiriusXM Data Service

Data service information, which is com-

prised of traffic information and weather

information, can be received via the

SiriusXM Radio.

To receive the data service information in

the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service is necessary.

Content set to use the SiriusXM data

service is reset when personal information

is initialized.

!Control screen and audio panel

Control screen

No. Function

1Perform the SXM setting. See be-

low. Refer to “SXM setting”F5-43.

Search for a channel which the

direction of higher frequency from

current frequency. Reproduce the

channel that can receive by 5

seconds.

No. Function

A list is displayed. There are three

types of lists (“Presets”,“Categories”

or “All Channels”) available.

.“Presets”: Preset channels are

displayed in a list.

.“Categories”: The channels of

the selected category are dis-

played in a list.

.“All Channels”: All selectable

channels are displayed in a list.

4Display the contents information of a

channel receiving.

Presets list (30 channels max.) is

displayed. Refer to “Presetting a

channel”F5-41.

Categories list is displayed. Refer to

“Selecting a channel from the list”

F5-41.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-37

Audio/Audio set

No. Function

All channels list is displayed.

The available received channels are

displayed, and you can select a

channel.

8Change to the Direct Tune display.

Refer to “Direct Tune”F5-42.

9Return to the previous display.

10 Return to the playback display.

Audio panel

No. Function

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-

19.

Turn right to step up channels and

turn left to step down channels.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-18.

Press to step up/down channels.

Press and hold to step up/down

channels fast.

5-38

!How to subscribe to SiriusXM Sa-

tellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service is necessary.

A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner

designed exclusively to receive broad-

casts provided under a separate subscrip-

tion.

!How to subscribe

It is necessary to enter into a separate

service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite

Radio in order to receive satellite broad-

cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-

tional activation and service subscription

fees apply that are not included in the

purchase price of the vehicle and digital

satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscription

rates and terms, or to subscribe to

SiriusXM Satellite Radio:

.U.S. customers:

Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

.Canadian customers:

Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

WARNING

.SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services

—Legal Disclaimers and Warn-

ings

–Fees and Taxes —Subscrip-

tion fee, taxes, one time acti-

vation fee, and other fees may

apply. Subscription fee is con-

sumer only. All fees and pro-

gramming subject to change.

Subscriptions subject to Cus-

tomer Agreement available at

www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or

www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

SiriusXM U.S. satellite and

data services are available

only in the contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM satellite

service is also available in

Canada: see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Explicit Language Notice —

Channels with frequent expli-

cit language are indicated

with an “XL”preceding the

channel name. Channel block-

ing is available for SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers by

notifying SiriusXM at:

.U.S. customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

.Canadian customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

CAUTION

.It is prohibited to copy, decom-

pile, disassemble, reverse engi-

neer, hack, manipulate or other-

wise make available any technol-

ogy or software incorporated in

receivers compatible with the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio System

or that support the XM website,

the Online Service or any of its

content. Furthermore, the

AMBE

voice compression soft-

ware included in this product is

protected by intellectual property

rights including patent rights,

copyrights, and trade secrets of

Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

.Note: this applies to SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers only

and not XM Ready devices.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-39

Audio/Audio set

NOTE

.SiriusXM Satellite Services —De-

scriptions

–Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio

brings you more of what you love,

all in one place. Get over 175

channels, including commercial-

free music, plus the best sports,

news, talk, comedy and entertain-

ment. Welcome to the world of

satellite radio. More information

about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is

available online at

www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) and

www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

.SiriusXM Satellite Services —Sub-

scription Instructions

–For SiriusXM Services requiring

a subscription (such as SiriusXM

Satellite Radio, and some Infotain-

ment & data services), the following

paragraph shall be included.

Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio

and some Infotainment & data ser-

vices monthly subscriptions sold

separately after trial period. Sub-

scription fee is consumer only. All

fees and programming subject to

change. Subscriptions are subject

to the Customer Agreement avail-

able at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or

www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio

Inc. All other marks, channel names

and logos are the property of their

respective owners.

For more information, program

schedules, and to subscribe or

extend subscription after compli-

mentary trial period; more informa-

tion is available at:

.U.S. customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

.Canadian customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

.SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely

responsible for the quality, availability

and content of the satellite radio ser-

vices provided, which are subject to

the terms and conditions of the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer ser-

vice agreement.

.Customers should have their radio

ID ready; the radio ID can be found by

tuning to “Ch 000”on the radio. For

details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO

ID”below.

.All fees and programming are the

responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite

Radio and are subject to change.

!How to change the source

Select the “Sirius XM”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

5-40

!Presetting a channel

1. The presets list is displayed via either

of the following procedures.

.When you touch the tab in the

SiriusXM main screen (if the list that

was displayed the last time is Presets).

.When you select the tab in each

list screen.

2. The current channel is stored if you

touch and hold the preset list key. You can

store up to 30 channels (A beep sounds

when a channel stored).

The playing icon is displayed for the

currently selected channel.

!Selecting a channel from the list

1. The categories list is displayed via

either of the following procedures.

.When you touch the tab in the

SiriusXM main screen (if the list that

was displayed the last time is Cate-

gories).

.When you select the tab in each

list screen.

2. Each channel list is displayed when

you select each category item.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-41

Audio/Audio set

In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message Contents

“Subscription Update”

“Press OK to Continue”

An update to your SiriusXM subscription has

been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Touch

any key to continue.

“Channel XXX Not Available”

(“XXX”refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel.

The channel number has been entered incor-

rectly, or the channel was removed from the

SiriusXM channel lineup.

“Channel XXX Not Subscribed Call.”

“Call SiriusXM to Subscribed.”

(“XXX”refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not included in your SiriusXM

subscription plan.

“Ch Locked”

“Lock Code?”

The selected channel has been locked by the

parental controls.

A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.

“Check Antenna”

Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is con-

nected to the SiriusXM tuner correctly.

Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or

sharp bends.

Replace the antenna if necessary.

“No Signal”The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna

must have a clear view of the southern sky.

NOTE

Contact SiriusXM

.Listener Care Center (U.S. customers):

1-866-635-2349

.Listener Care Centre (Canadian customers):

1-877-209-0079

!Direct Tune

1. A channel input screen is displayed

when you touch the tab.

2. Input any number and touch the “OK”

key, receive the channel which input.

5-42

!SXM setting

1. An option menu screen is displayed

when you touch the tab on the lower

left side of the screen. The “Options”

screen will appear.

Option menu screen

No. Function

Set the lock function of each chan-

nel. Password input is necessary for

operation.

2Set the password of the lock func-

tion.

2. A password input screen is displayed

when you touch the “Set”key of the

Channel Lock function.

Password input screen

3. When the input password is approved,

change to the lock channel selection

screen.

Lock channel selection screen

4. In the channel list, touch the channel

that should be locked.

!Displaying the Radio ID

Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a

unique radio ID. The “Radio ID”is required

when activating an SiriusXM Satellite

Services or when reporting a problem.

.If “Ch 000”is selected using the

AUDIO/TUNE knob, the ID code will be

displayed.

.Touch the key. The Radio ID will be

displayed on the “Options”screen.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-43

Audio/Audio set

&aha

by HARMAN

aha is a cloud-based application that

connects to the system and gives you

access to your favorite web content safely

and easily. There are over 30,000 stations

spanning internet radio, personalized mu-

sic, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, res-

taurant and hotel searches, weather and

more. For more about aha, go to the aha

site (http://www.aharadio.com).

When connecting iPhone and iPod touch

or Android devices with the aha applica-

tion installed, you can control, view, and

hear aha content through the system.

In order to connect to this system, use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or

Android devices will be referred to as a

smartphone.

WARNING

Do not connect or operate the

smartphone while driving. Doing so

may result in loss of control of your

vehicle and cause an accident or

serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not leave your smartphone in

the car. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the smartphone.

.Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is connected

as this may damage the smart-

phone or its terminal.

.Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

5-44

!Control screen and panel

Control screen (main screen and station screen)

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

2Select to open the station list. Refer to

“Using aha application”F5-49.

3Select to fast forward the current con-

tent item by 30 seconds.

4Select to display the contents list of the

selected station.

Select to make a phone call to the

current content item.

A phone number is distributed depend-

ing on content items.

This feature is available only in these

cases.

No. Function

The track pauses when pressed during

playback and plays back when touched

during pause.

7Select to set thumbs up.

8Select to set thumbs down.

Select to start the playback from the

beginning of the content in the target

station.

10 Select to rewind the current content

item by 15 seconds.

11 Select to display the preset list.

12 Return to the control screen.

No. Function

13 Select to display the nearby list.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-45

Audio/Audio set

Audio panel

No. Function

1Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

2Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-19.

Press to display the station operation

screen.

Press to select an audio mode.

Turn to display the next/previous con-

tent item.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source”F5-18.

5Press to display the next/previous con-

tent item.

NOTE

.For safety reasons, certain func-

tions are not available while your

vehicle is in motion.

.In order to maximize signal recep-

tion, performance and precision of the

smartphone, please ensure the smart-

phone is placed as close to the system

as possible, while ensuring it is stowed

and secure while driving.

.When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC”or “ON”position, the battery of

the connected iPhone/iPod touch is

charged.

.iPhone/iPod touch may not be re-

cognized when the ignition switch is in

the “ACC”or “ON”position. In this

case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch

and reconnect it.

.The accuracy of the displayed in-

formation or the signal reception per-

formance depends on the smartphone

or the connected device, and it’s wire-

less connection.

.Since the aha application uses sig-

nals from GPS satellites and wireless

communication lines, it may not work

properly in the following locations.

–In a tunnel

–In underground parking lots

5-46

–Outside wireless communication

range, such as some countryside

areas

–Where the wireless communica-

tion network is congested, or where

communications are restricted

.Depending on the circumstances

and environment, the signal may be

weak or not be received. In such cases,

an error may occur.

.Top 35 entries in the preset station

list on the smartphone are displayed.

When there are more than 35 entries in

the preset station list, change the order

of the entries in the list on the smart-

phone. You can change the priority of

your preset stations within the aha

application (after disconnected from

this system) to modify the station list

shown on the screen. Please see your

smartphone aha application “Edit Pre-

sets (in Main menu)”to modify this list.

.For operating the smartphone, see

the instruction manual that comes with

it.

.If there are multiple music files

stored on your iPhone or iPod touch,

it may take some time until playback

starts.

.Playback may be intermittent when

you switch to streaming Bluetooth

audio from aha on your smartphone

device.

.When connecting the device via

Bluetooth, the communication speed

may become slower than via USB.

!Before using aha application

In order to use the aha application on this

system, the application must be installed

on the smartphone.

!Settings required to use aha

application

.Search and download the aha applica-

tion from your smartphone app store.

–iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App

Store via iTunes

–Android device: Google Play Store

.Create an account and login to the aha

application on the smartphone.

NOTE

Please use the latest version of the aha

application.

!About app-based connected con-

tent

Requirements for using the connected

content services of the aha application

on this system.

.Latest version of the system is compa-

tible with connected content application(s)

for the smartphone, available from aha,

downloaded to your smartphone.

.A current account with a wireless

content service provider.

.A smartphone data plan: If the data

plan for your smartphone does not provide

for unlimited data usage, additional

charges from your carrier may apply for

accessing app-based connected content

via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi or 4G LTE wireless

networks.

.Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G,

Wi-Fi or 4G LTE networks.

NOTE

.Changes to product specifications

may result in differences between the

content of the manual and features of

the product.

.Be careful not to exceed the data

usage limits for your smartphone.

Doing so will result in additional data

usage charges from your phone car-

rier.

.Access to app-based connected

content will depend on the availability

of wireless cell and/or Wi-Fi network

coverage for the purpose of allowing

your smartphone to connect to the

internet.

.Service availability may be geogra-

phically limited by region. Consult the

wireless connected content service

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-47

Audio/Audio set

provider for additional information.

.Ability of this product to access

connected content is subject to change

without notice and could be affected by

any of the following: compatibility

issues with future firmware versions

of the smartphone; compatibility is-

sues with future versions of the con-

nected content application(s) for the

smartphone; changes to or disconti-

nuation of the connected content ap-

plication(s) or service by its provider.

.Communication and phone call

charges for smartphones should be

paid by the wireless subscriber.

.If you lose the data in a smartphone

or other device while using it with the

system, no compensation will be given

for the lost data.

.SUBARU CORPORATION makes no

guarantee regarding the content pro-

vided by aha.

.aha may not work due to factors on

smartphones, smartphone applications

or stations. SUBARU CORPORATION is

not responsible for it.

!About the supported devices

This system supports the following de-

vices.

.For iPhone/iPod touch users

Type Generation

Firmware

version or

iPhone

iPhone 3G iOS 4.2.x

iPhone 3GS iOS 6.1.x

iPhone 4 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 4s iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5c iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5s iOS 7.0.x

iPod touch

iPod touch iOS 3.1.x

iPod touch 2 iOS 4.2.x

iPod touch 3 iOS 5.1.x

iPod touch 4 iOS 6.1.x

iPod touch 5 iOS 7.0.x

NOTE

Note that the warranty does not apply if

an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is

connected.

.For Android device users

Android OS Specification Profile

Android

Ver. 2.2 or

Ver. 2.3

Bluetooth

Specification

Ver. 1.1 or

higher

(Ver. 2.0 +

EDR or higher

is recom-

mended)

.aha Con-

nect Bin-

ary API

over SPP

.Digital

audio by

A2DP

NOTE

The available functions may vary de-

pending on the type of Android device.

!Connecting a smartphone

If you connect a smartphone to this

system after starting a supported aha

application on the smartphone, you can

display and operate the aha application

displayed on the smartphone on the

system screen.

1. Run the aha application on your

smartphone.

2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the

USB port or connect the Android device

by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP

and A2DP profile).

.For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-

ing and disconnecting a USB memory/

portable device”F5-17.

.For details about registering or con-

5-48

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device”F5-66.

NOTE

When iPhone/iPod touch and Android

devices are connected at the same

time, iPhone/iPod touch is prioritized.

!How to change the source

.Select the “aha”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Basic operation”

F5-18.

.Select the “aha”key on the APPS

screen. Refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”

F5-26.

NOTE

When starting-up “aha”,thereare

some smartphone models for which

“aha”application does not start up

automatically.

!Using aha application

1. When the top screen is displayed,

touch the station key.

Example of the main screen

2. Select the desired station from the list.

The selected station is displayed.

NOTE

.The following operations are not

available on this system. Perform these

operations on the smartphone.

–Add/Reorder/Delete stations

–Login to Facebook/Twitter

.For the aha function, the following

touch screen gestures are not avail-

able.

–Multi-touch operation

–Double-tap

.For details on the services or the

operations, check the aha site

(http://www.aharadio.com) on the inter-

net.

.The button display will vary depend-

ing on each station or content item.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-49

Audio/Audio set

&Pandora

(if equipped)

Pandora is an application for a smart-

phone. This can automatically select and

play recommended tracks.

By rating the track currently playing, tracks

that better match your preference will be

recommended.

In order to connect to this system, use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

Depending on differences between mod-

els or software version etc., some models

might be incompatible with this system.

This function is not available if the

Pandora application has not been in-

stalled on the smartphone.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the smartphone while

driving. Doing so may result in loss

of control of your vehicle and cause

an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not leave your smartphone in

the car. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the smartphone.

.Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is connected

as this may damage the smart-

phone or its terminal.

.Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

NOTE

Follow the specific operation proce-

dures for the smartphone application.

5-50

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

2Select to open the station list. Refer to

“Station list”F5-52.

3Select to skip the current track.

The track pauses when touched during

playback and plays when touched

during pause.

Select to set thumbs up.

This gives a high rating to the current

song.

All other similar songs will be played

back more frequently.

No. Function

Select to set thumbs down.

This gives a low rating to the current

song.

All other similar songs will be played

back less frequently.

When you select thumbs down, the

current track is skipped.

During playback of a station, you can

use this key to bookmark a song or

artist. Refer to “Registering Bookmarks”

F5-52.

8Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn clockwise to skip to the next track.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source”F5-18.

10 Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-19.

No. Function

11 Press to skip to the next track/cover art.

!Connecting a smartphone

Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the

USB port or connect the Android device

by using Bluetooth connection (SPP and

A2DP profile).

.For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device”F5-17.

.For details about registering or con-

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

de-

vice”F5-66.

!How to change the source

The Pandora operation screen can be

reached by the following methods:

.Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to

“Connecting a Bluetooth device”F5-69 or

“Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device”F5-17.

.Select the “Pandora”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

.Select the “Pandora”key on the APPS

screen. Refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”

F5-26.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-51

Audio/Audio set

NOTE

When starting-up Pandora, there are

some smartphone models for which

Pandora application does not start up

automatically.

!Registering Bookmarks

You can register the music and artist now

being played in Bookmark.

1. Touch the tab.

2. Select the desired key. The following

items are appeared on the screen.

Item Function

Track

When selected after the Book-

mark key is pressed, the current

track is bookmarked.

Artist

When selected after the Book-

mark key is pressed, the current

artist is bookmarked.

Cancel Select to cancel the bookmark

operation.

!Station list

You can select, add or delete a station.

When the tab is touched on the main

screen, a station list will be displayed.

No. Function

Select to sort the list in the chronologi-

cal order of when the Station List was

created.

Select to create a station.

The station can be created using track

names or artist names.

3Select to delete a station.

4Return to the control screen.

5Select to sort the list based on the

alphabetical order of the station names.

!Store the station

You can register a station.

1. Touch the tab on the Pandora

main screen.

2. Touch the “New Station”key, and then

select the desired key.

Item Function

From Track Select to create a station using a

track name.

From Artist Select to create a station using

an artist name.

Cancel Select to cancel the operation to

add a station.

!Delete the station

You can delete a station.

1. Touch the tab on the Pandora top

screen.

2. Touch the “Delete Station”key, and

then the station list is appeared.

3. Select the item to delete the station. If

the confirmation screen appears and the

“OK”key is selected, the selected station

will be deleted from station list.

5-52

&CD

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode”F5-54.

Audio CD:

Select to display a track list.

MP3/WMA/AAC disc:

Select to display a folder list.

4Shows progress.

The tracks in the disc are played

back for 10 seconds each from the

beginning of the track.

No. Function

6MP3/WMA/AAC disc:

Select to choose a folder.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

8Press to eject a disc.

9Disc slot

Turn to select a track/file.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-18.

No. Function

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-

19.

Press to select a track/file.

Press and hold to fast forward/re-

wind.

NOTE

.Depending on the compression data

format of the inserted CD, some keys

may not be displayed on the screen.

.If a disc contains CD-DA files and

MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA

files can be played back.

.If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the

title of the disc and track will be

displayed. Up to 32 characters can be

displayed.

.If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,

only the track number would be dis-

played on the screen.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-53

Audio/Audio set

!Loading a disc

CAUTION

Never try to disassemble the audio

kit or lubricate any part of the CD

player. Do not insert anything other

than a disc into the slot.

Insert a disc into the disc slot. After

insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.

NOTE

When inserting a disc, gently insert it

with the label facing up.

!Unloading a disc

Press the eject button to remove the disc.

!How to change the source

The CD operation screen can be reached

by the following methods:

.Insert a disc. Refer to “Loading a disc”

F5-54.

.Select the “DISC”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

!Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.

Return to the control screen.

NOTE

Depending on the compression data

formant of the inserted CD, the dis-

played play mode may differ from the

illustration shown here.

5-54

&USB memory

Audio files on the USB memory can be

played.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the USB memory while

driving. Doing so may result in

losing control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not leave your USB memory

in the car. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the USB memory.

.Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

USB memory while it is con-

nected as this may damage the

USB memory or its terminal.

.Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

USB memory or its terminal.

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode”F5-56.

3Select to display folder list.

4Shows progress.

The tracks in the folder are played

back 10 seconds each from the

beginning of the track.

6Select to choose a folder.

7Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

No. Function

Turn to select a file/track.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-18.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-

19.

10 Press to select a file/track.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-55

Audio/Audio set

!Connecting a USB device

You can connect a USB device to the

vehicle USB port. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device”F5-17.

!How to change the source

The USB Audio playback screen can be

reached by the following methods:

.Connect a USB memory. Refer to

“Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device”F5-17.

.Select the “USB/iPod”key on the

source select screen. Refer to “Selecting

an audio source”F5-18.

!Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.

Return to the control screen.

&iPod

Audio files on the iPod can be played.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the iPod while driving.

Doing so may result in loss of

control of your vehicle and cause

an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not leave your portable player

in the car. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the portable player.

.Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table player while it is connected

as this may damage the portable

player or its terminal.

.Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

5-56

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode”F5-58.

3Select to display iPod List. Refer to

“iPod settings”F5-58.

4Shows progress.

5Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to select a track/file.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source”F5-18.

7Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-19.

No. Function

8Press to select a track/file.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

NOTE

.When an iPod is connected using a

genuine USB cable, the iPod starts

charging its battery.

.When an iPod is connected and the

audio source is changed to iPod mode,

the iPod will resume playing from the

same point it was last used.

.Depending on the iPod that is con-

nected to the system, certain functions

may not be available.

.Files/tracks selected by operating a

connected iPod may not be recognized

or displayed properly.

!Connecting the iPod

You can connect an iPod to the vehicle

USB port using the USB cable. Refer to

“Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device”F5-17.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-57

Audio/Audio set

!How to change the source

TheiPodoperationscreencanbe

reached by the following methods:

.Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device”F5-17.

.Select the “USB/iPod”key on the

source select screen. Refer to “Selecting

an audio source”F5-18.

!Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to turn off shuffle.

Touch to start shuffle album.

Return to the control screen.

!iPod settings

You can choose the following items from

the list screen after touching the tab

on the screen.

Icon Function

Select to display the play list.

Select to display tracks list.

Select to display artists list.

Select to display albums list.

Select to open other list (“Gen-

res”,“Composers”,“Audiobooks”

and “Podcast”).

Select to open “Genres”list.

Select to open “Composers”list.

Select to open “Audiobooks”list.

Select to open “Podcasts”list.

&Bluetooth audio

The Bluetooth audio system enables

users to enjoy listening to music that is

played on a portable player on the vehicle

speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth, a

wireless data system capable of playing

portable audio music without cables. If

your device does not support Bluetooth,

the Bluetooth audio system will not func-

tion.

WARNING

.Do not operate the player’s con-

trols or connect to the Bluetooth

audio system while driving.

Doing so may result in loss of

control of your vehicle and cause

an accident or serious injury.

.Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization ther-

apy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

Bluetooth antennas. The radio

waves may affect the operation

of such devices.

5-58

.Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-

synchronization therapy-pace-

makers or implantable cardiover-

ter defibrillators should consult

the manufacturer of the device

for information about its opera-

tion under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have

unexpected effects on the opera-

tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your portable player in

the vehicle. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the portable player.

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode”F5-60.

Select to display as a list (for the

models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high-

er).

The track pauses when touched dur-

ing playback and plays when touched

during pause.

Select to open Bluetooth Settings.

Refer to “Setting Bluetooth details”

F5-69.

6Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

No. Function

Turn to select a track.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source”F5-18.

8Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-19.

9Press to select a track.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-59

Audio/Audio set

NOTE

.Depending on the Bluetooth device

that is connected to the system, the

music may start playing when selecting

the key while it is paused. Con-

versely, the music may pause when

selecting the key while it is playing.

.In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function:

–The Bluetooth device is turned

off.

–The Bluetooth device is not con-

nected.

–The Bluetooth device has a low

battery.

.It may take time to connect the

phone when Bluetooth audio is being

played.

.For operating the portable player,

see the instruction manual that comes

with it.

.If the Bluetooth device is discon-

nected due to poor reception from the

Bluetooth network when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC”or “ON”posi-

tion, the system will automatically

reconnect to the portable player.

.If the Bluetooth device is discon-

nected on purpose, such as being

turned off, this does not happen.

Reconnect the portable player manu-

ally.

.Bluetooth device information is re-

gistered when the Bluetooth device is

connected to the Bluetooth audio sys-

tem. When selling or disposing of the

vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio

information from the system. Refer to

“Bluetooth

settings”F5-66.

!Connecting a Bluetooth device

To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is

necessary to register a Bluetooth device

with the system.

.Registering an additional device

1. Select the “Add”key on the Bluetooth

devices connection screen.

2. For more information: Refer to “Regis-

tering/connecting Bluetooth

device”F5-

66.

.Selecting a registered device

1. Select the “Select”key on the Blue-

tooth devices connection screen.

2. For more information: Refer to “BT

Devices Connection screen”F5-69.

!How to change the source

Select the “BT Audio”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

NOTE

Depending on the type of portable

player connected, some functions

may not be available and/or the screen

may look differently than shown in this

manual.

!Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to repeat the tracks in the

group.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to play tracks in the order

in which they are registered in

the audio device.

Touch to start shuffle group.

5-60

Icon Function

Return to the control screen.

NOTE

If the connected device does not sup-

port the group repeat mode, the group

functions are not available.

&AUX

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the portable audio device

while driving. Doing so may result in

loss of control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not leave your portable audio

device in the vehicle. The tem-

perature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in da-

mage to the player.

.Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table audio device while it is

connected as this may damage

the portable audio device or its

terminal.

.Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable audio device or its term-

inal.

Audio/Audio set

–CONTINUED –

5-61

Audio/Audio set

!Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

1Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

2Select to adjust the audio gain level.

Refer to “Audio level settings”F5-62.

3Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-18.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-

19.

!Connecting a portable audio device

You can connect a portable audio device

to the vehicle AUX jack. Refer to “Con-

necting and disconnecting a USB mem-

ory/portable device”F5-17.

!How to change the source

The AUX operation screen can be

reached by the following methods:

.Connect a portable audio device. Refer

to “Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device”F5-17.

.Select the “AUX”key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source”F5-18.

!Audio level settings

You can set the audio gain level.

1. Select the tab on the screen, and

then touch the right side key of the “Audio

Level”key.

2. Select the audio level from the follow-

ing items.

.Low

.Mid

.High

5-62

Steering switches for audio

Some parts of the audio/visual system can

be adjusted using the switches on the

steering wheel.

1) + −switch

2) / switch

3) Mute/Enter switch

4) List switch

5) Back switch

6) Source switch

Audio/Steering switches for audio

–CONTINUED –

5-63

Audio/Steering switches for audio

.+/−switch

Mode Operation Function

Except list screen Press Volume up/down

Press and hold Volume up/down continuously

List screen Press Move cursor up/down

Pandora main screen (if equipped) Press and hold “+”switch is thumb up/“−”switch is thumb down

./ switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM (if equipped)

Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold Seek up/down continuously while the switch is

being pressed

aha

Press Content up/down

Press and hold

Reverse the current content item for 15 sec-

onds/Fast forward the current content item for

30 seconds

Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB, iPod, BT

audio

Press Select a track/file

Press and hold Fast forward/rewind

Pandora (if equipped) Press and hold Thumbs up

List screen Press Move cursor left/right

5-64

.Mute/Enter switch

Mode Operation Function

List screen Press Select cursor entry

CD, USB, iPod, BT audio, Pandora (if equipped), aha Press Pause or play back

AM/FM radio, AUX, SiriusXM (if equipped) Press Mute or cancel mute

.Back switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen

All Press and hold Return to the HOME screen

.List switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Show list screen

.Source switch

Mode Operation Function

All Press Change audio modes

NOTE

In the aha, Pandora (if equipped) and SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) mode, some operation may be done on the screen

depend on the selected APPS.

Audio/Steering switches for audio 5-65

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

Bluetooth

settings

WARNING

Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe

location before connecting or oper-

ating a Bluetooth phone or audio

device. Failure to do so may result

in loss of control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

&Regulatory information

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc.

&Registering/connecting

Bluetooth

device

You can register up to five devices,

regardless of whether they are Bluetooth

phones or audio devices.

NOTE

.Once the phone has been regis-

tered, it is possible to use the hands-

free system or Bluetooth audio.

.Devices cannot be registered during

driving.

!Registering a Bluetooth phone for

the first time

To use the hands-free system, it is

necessary to register a Bluetooth phone

with the system.

For details about registering a Bluetooth

device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

Audio device for the first time”F5-67.

1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting

of your cell phone on.

.This function is not available when

Bluetooth connection setting of your

cell phone is set to off.

2. Press the HOME button and select the

“SETTINGS”key.

3. Touch the tab and then the “SET-

TINGS”screen will appear.

Settings (When the tab is selected)

.Operations up to this point can also

be performed by pressing the off hook

switch on the steering wheel.

4. To register a device, touch the “Set”

key on “BT Devices Connection”.

5-66

“BT Devices Connection”screen (At the

initial startup and when no device is

registered).

5. Touch the “Add”key.

When the “Add”key is selected (Waiting

for the connection request from a device).

.For details about operating the Blue-

tooth device, see the manual that

comes with it.

.To cancel the registration, touch the

“Cancel”key.

6. Register the Bluetooth device using

your Bluetooth device.

.A PIN-code is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible

Bluetooth devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth device being con-

nected, a message confirming regis-

tration may be displayed on the Blue-

tooth device’s screen. Respond and

operate the Bluetooth device accord-

ing to the confirmation message.

7. Check that the screen is displayed

when registration is complete.

.The system waits for connection

requests coming from the registered

device.

.At this stage, the Bluetooth func-

tions are not yet available.

!Registering a Bluetooth Audio de-

vice for the first time

To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary

to register an audio device with the

system.

The device registration procedure is the

same for both the hands-free system and

Bluetooth audio.

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time”F5-66.

2. Select the “Add”key.

The “Add”key is not displayed when five

devices are already registered.

To add another device, you need to delete

one of the registered devices.

Press the key for the device to be

deleted, and then select the “OK”key.

3. Register the Bluetooth device using

your Bluetooth device.

.A PIN-code is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible

Bluetooth devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth device being con-

nected, a message confirming regis-

tration may be displayed on the Blue-

tooth device’s screen. Respond and

operate the Bluetooth device accord-

ing to the confirmation message.

4. Check that the screen is displayed

when registration is complete.

.The system waits for connection

requests coming from the registered

device.

.At this stage, the Bluetooth func-

tions are not yet available.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

–CONTINUED –

5-67

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

!Profiles

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth

Audio Device Bluetooth Specification Registering a Bluetooth de-

vice Ver. 1.1 Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5

OPP (Object Push Profile)

Transferring the contacts

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1

PBAP (Phone Book Access

profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0

MAP (Message Access

Profile) Bluetooth phone message —Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile) Connecting a Bluetooth

phone —Ver. 1.1

Bluetooth Audio Device

A2DP (Advanced Audio

Distribution Profile) Bluetooth audio system

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2

AVRCP (Audio/Video Re-

mote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.4

NOTE

.If your cell phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles

individually will not be possible.

.If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may

not work properly.

.For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.

5-68

&Setting Bluetooth details

!BT Devices Connection screen

1. Press the HOME button.

2. Touch the “SETTINGS”key and then

touch the tab.

3. Touch the “BT Devices Connection”

key and then select the desired device to

“BT Devices Connection”screen (One

device is registered.)

No. Function

tering/connecting Bluetooth

device”

F5-66.

2Make the connection to the registered

device.

No. Function

This shows the status of the device

connection profile. (The icon illuminates

while connected.)

4Delete the registered device. Refer to

“Deleting a Bluetooth device”F5-70.

Switch to connect/disconnect Bluetooth

communication. Refer to “Bluetooth

ON/OFF”F5-69.

!Connecting a Bluetooth device

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (phones and

audio devices) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been

registered, select which device to connect

to.

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection

screen”F5-69.

2. Select the device to be connected.

.Supported profile icons will be dis-

played.

–: Phone

–: Audio device

–: Smartphone Application

.Supported profile icons for currently

connected devices will illuminate.

.The audio icon illuminates only

when in the Bluetooth audio mode.

.All icons are dimmed when Blue-

tooth is set to off or when the connec-

tion cannot be made with the device.

NOTE

.It may take time if the device con-

nection is carried out during Bluetooth

audio playback.

.Depending on the type of Bluetooth

device being connected, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the device.

.It is not possible to establish a

Bluetooth connection with iOS devices

currently connected with a USB cable.

.Supported profile icons of the un-

selected devices are not displayed if

several Bluetooth devices have been

registered.

!Bluetooth ON/OFF

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection

screen”F5-69.

2. Select the “ON”or “OFF”key by the

right side of the “Connect with Bluetooth”

key. The “ON”key establishes a connec-

tion, and the “OFF”key disconnects the

connection.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

–CONTINUED –

5-69

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

NOTE

The setting is fixed as the “OFF”key

when no device is registered.

!Deleting a Bluetooth device

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection

screen”F5-69.

2. Select the desired device.

3. Touch the key for the device to be

deleted, and then select the “OK”key.

NOTE

When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the

contact data will be deleted at the same

time.

!“In-Car-Device setting”screen

The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed

and changed.

1. Display the “SETTINGS”screen. Refer

to “Registering a Bluetooth phone for the

first time”F5-66.

2. On the “SETTINGS”screen for “In-

Car-Device setting”, select the “Set”key.

No. Function

1Display the Bluetooth device address

of the in-vehicle equipment.

Display the Bluetooth device name of

the in-vehicle equipment. The default

name is “SUBARU BT”, which can be

changed by selecting it and entering

alphanumeric characters.

Display the PIN code of the in-vehicle

equipment. The default code is

“1234”, which can be changed by

selecting it and entering numbers.

Delete one character from the cur-

rently selected item (BT device name

or the PIN code).

5Save the current BT device name and

PIN code.

6Numeric input keys.

No. Function

7Switch the screen to input characters.

!Editing the Bluetooth device

name

The device name can be set or changed.

1. Touch the “Name”key.

2. Enter a name and then select the “Set”

key.

!Editing the PIN-Code

The PIN-code can be set or changed.

1. Select the “PIN”Key.

2. Enter a PIN-code and then select the

“Set”key.

NOTE

If the “PIN”key is already selected, the

“ABC”key is cross-hatched and dis-

abled.

5-70

Hands-free phone system

The hands-free system enables calls to be

made and received without having to take

your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth

is a wireless data system that enables cell

phones to be used without being con-

nected by a cable or placed in a cradle.

The operating procedure of the phone is

explained here.

WARNING

.While driving, do not use a cell

phone or connect the Bluetooth

phone. Doing so may result in

loss of control of your vehicle

and cause an accident or serious

injury.

.Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization ther-

apy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

Bluetooth antennas. The radio

waves may affect the operation

of such devices.

.Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-

synchronization therapy-pace-

makers or implantable cardiover-

ter defibrillators should consult

the manufacturer of the device

for information about its opera-

tion under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have

unexpected effects on the opera-

tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your cell phone in the

vehicle. The temperature inside may

rise to a level that could damage the

phone.

NOTE

.If your cell phone does not support

Bluetooth, this system cannot function.

.In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function:

–The cell phone is turned off.

–The current position is outside

the communication area.

–The cell phone is not connected.

–The cell phone has a low battery.

.When using the hands free function

and other Bluetooth functions at the

same time, the following problems may

occur:

–The Bluetooth connection may

be cut.

–Noise may be heard when play-

ing back voice with the Bluetooth

function.

.The other party’s voice will be heard

from the front speakers. The audio/

visual system will be muted during

phone calls or when hands-free voice

commands are used.

.Talk alternately with the other party

on the phone. If both parties speak at

the same time, the other party may not

hear what has been said. (This is not a

malfunction.)

.Keep call volume down. Otherwise,

the other party’s voice may be audible

outside the vehicle and voice echo may

increase. When talking on the phone,

speak clearly towards the microphone.

.The other party may not hear you

clearly when:

–Drivingonanunpavedroad.

(Making excessive traffic noise.)

–Driving at high speeds.

–The moonroof or windows are

open.

–The air conditioning vents are

Audio/Hands–free phone system

–CONTINUED –

5-71

Audio/Hands–free phone system

pointed towards the microphone.

–The sound of the air conditioning

fan is loud.

–Thereisanegativeeffecton

sound quality due to the phone

and/or network being used.

.When another phone is connected,

the following registered data cannot be

read:

–Contact data

–Call history data

–All phone settings

.When selling or disposing of the

vehicle, initialize the data. Refer to

“Unit settings”F5-19.

.Once initialized, the data and set-

tings will be erased. Take extra caution

when initializing the data.

.The voice command system sup-

ports phone commands, so dialing a

phone number using your voice is

possible. Refer to “Voice command

system”F5-81.

.The images shown in this Owner’s

Manual are sample images. The actual

images may vary depending on the

market and specifications of your ve-

hicle.

&Control screen

PHONE (Menu) screen

PHONE (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

1Open the “Incoming Calls”screen.

Refer to “By incoming calls”F5-74.

2Open the “Outgoing Calls”screen.

Refer to “By outgoing calls”F5-75.

3Open the “Contacts”screen. Refer to

“By contacts list”F5-75.

4Open the dialpad screen. Refer to “By

Dialpad”F5-76.

Open the phone volume settings

screen. Refer to “Phone volume set-

tings”F5-79.

Use to make a phone call. You cannot

press this key until you open the

dialpad screen and enter a phone

number.

Open the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth

details”F5-69.

8Enter the phone number that you

want to call.

9Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.

NOTE

When the cell phone is not registered

and the Bluetooth setting is off, a

message is displayed instead of menu

items.

5-72

&Registering/connecting a

Bluetooth phone

To use the hands-free system for cell

phones, it is necessary to register a cell

phone with the system. Refer to “Register-

ing/connecting Bluetooth

device”F5-66.

!Bluetooth phone condition display

The condition of the Bluetooth phone

appears on the upper right side of the

screen.

&Using the phone switch/mi-

crophone

.Steering switch

By pressing the steering switch, a call can

be received or ended without taking your

hands off the steering wheel.

1) Volume control switch

2) Off hook switch

3) On hook switch

.Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on

the phone.

1) Models without SUBARU STARLINK

2) Models with SUBARU STARLINK

(U.S.-spec. models only)

&How to change the hands-

free phone system

The phone (menu) screen can be used to

make a phone call. To display the hands-

free operation screen, press the HOME

button and then select the “PHONE”key,

or press the off hook switch on the

steering wheel.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

–CONTINUED –

5-73

Audio/Hands–free phone system

&Making a call

There are several methods by which a call

can be made, as described below.

1. Press the HOME button on the audio

panel.

2. Touch the “PHONE”key.

3. Select the desired key to make a call

from the list.

Item Function

Incoming

Calls

Display the history of incoming

calls. Refer to “By incoming

calls”F5-74.

Outgoing

Calls

Display the history of outgoing

calls. Refer to “By outgoing calls”

F5-75.

Contacts Display the phonebook. Refer to

“By contacts list”F5-75.

Item Function

Dialpad Dial a phone number. Refer to

“By Dialpad”F5-76.

NOTE

You can also make a call by using the

following functions.

.Make a call using the off hook

switch on the steering wheel. Refer to

“By off hook switch”F5-77.

.Make a call using voice operation.

Refer to “Voice command system”F5-

81.

!By incoming calls

On the phone (menu) screen, select the

“Incoming Calls”key to open the “Incom-

ing Calls”screen.

You can make a call by selecting an item

in the incoming call history list.

If there is no incoming call history, a

message appears to indicate that there

is no incoming call history data.

Incoming Calls screen

No. Function

1Open the “Outgoing Calls”screen.

2Open the “Contacts”screen.

Delete all incoming call history data.

The “Delete All”key is disabled when

there is no incoming call history.

When you select an item in the history list

on the “Incoming Calls”screen, the out-

going call screen opens.

NOTE

.Up to 10 items in the incoming call

history are listed. Scroll the screen to

see items that are not on the screen.

.When making a call to the same

5-74

number continuously, only the most

recent call is listed in call history.

.When a phone number registered in

the contact list is received, the name is

displayed.

.Number-withheld calls are also

memorized in the system.

.International phone calls may not be

made depending on the type of cell

phone you have.

.The list should group together con-

secutive entries with the same phone

number and same call type.

!By outgoing calls

On the phone (menu) screen, select the

“Outgoing Calls”key to open the “Out-

going Calls”screen. You can make a call

by selecting an item in the outgoing call

history list.

If there is no outgoing call history, a

message appears to indicate that there

is no outgoing call history data.

Outgoing Calls screen

No. Function

1Open the “Incoming Calls”screen.

2Open the “Contacts”screen.

Delete all outgoing call history data.

The “Delete All”key is disabled when

there is no outgoing call history.

When you select an item in the history list

on the “Outgoing Calls”screen, the out-

going call screen opens.

NOTE

.Up to 10 items in the outgoing call

history are listed. Scroll the screen to

see items that are not on the screen.

.When making a call to the same

number continuously, only the most

recent call is listed in call history.

.When a phone number registered in

the contact list is received, the name is

displayed.

.Number-withheld calls are also

memorized in the system.

.International phone calls may not be

made depending on the type of cell

phone you have.

.The list should group together con-

secutive entries with the same phone

number and same call type.

!By contacts list

On the phone (menu) screen, select the

“Contacts”key to open the phone number

list screen.

You can make a call by selecting an item

in the list (up to five phone numbers are

listed).

If there is no contact data, a message is

displayed to indicate that there is no

contact data.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

–CONTINUED –

5-75

Audio/Hands–free phone system

Contacts screen

No. Function

1Open the “Incoming Calls”screen.

2Open the “Outgoing Calls”screen.

Open a pop-up screen for starting the

download of contact data. Refer to

“Update contacts from phone”F5-80.

Delete all contact data. The “Delete

All”key is disabled when there is no

contact data. Refer to “Deleting the

contact data”F5-81.

No. Function

Open a list of contacts that starts with

the selected character. This key is

cross-hatched and cannot be se-

lected if there is no contact data that

starts with the selected character.

Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the

list of contacts.

When you select a phone number on the

screen, the outgoing call screen opens.

NOTE

Up to 1000 items in the contact data are

listed. Scroll the screen to see items

that are not on the screen.

!When the contact is empty

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-

patible Bluetooth phones

On the “Contacts”screen, select the

“Download Contacts”key. A screen where

you can select how to download contacts

opens.

You can select to download all items or

download one item. For details, refer to

“Update contacts from phone”F5-80.

!Delete contacts

When the “Delete All”key is selected, all

contact data downloaded into the in-

vehicle equipment will be deleted.

Refer to “Deleting the contact data”F5-

81.

!By Dialpad

Input the phone number manually using

the keypad displayed on the screen.

Phone (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

Allow you to enter numbers from 0 to

9 and *, #, and +. To enter “+”, press

and hold the “0”key.

2Delete one character from the entered

characters.

5-76

No. Function

3Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.

Open the “Outgoing Calls”screen and

dials the entered phone number. This

is the same as pressing the off hook

switch on the steering wheel. This key

is cross-hatched and cannot be se-

lected until the phone number is

entered.

5Open the “Options”screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings”F5-79.

Open the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth

details”F5-69.

When you enter a phone number on the

screen and select the key, the “Out-

going Call”screen opens.

!By off hook switch

Calls can be made using the latest call

history item.

1. Press the off hook switch on the

steering wheel to display the phone

(menu) screen.

2. Check that the call screen is dis-

played.

!Outgoing screen

Outgoing call screen

No. Function

1Open the “Options”screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings”F5-79.

Abort the call. The screen returns to

the phone (menu) screen. This is the

same as pressing the on hook switch

on the steering wheel.

NOTE

.Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone being connected, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the phone.

.When you are on the outgoing call

screen, the screen changes to the call

screen when the other party answers

the call.

.The , , and keys are disabled

on the outgoing call screen.

&Receiving a call

!Incoming calls

When a call is received, the incoming call

screen is displayed with a sound.

When you receive a phone call while the

cell phone is connected, the screen

changes to the incoming call screen.

Incoming call screen

No. Function

1Open the “Options”screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings”F5-79.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

–CONTINUED –

5-77

Audio/Hands–free phone system

No. Function

Put the incoming call on hold. This

function may not work on some cell

phone models. This function is the

same as pressing the on hook switch

on the steering wheel for a short

period of time.

Open the call screen. This function is

the same as pressing the off hook

switch on the steering wheel.

Reject the incoming call. This function

is the same as pressing and holding

the on hook switch on the steering

wheel.

NOTE

.During international phone calls, the

other party’s name or number may not

be displayed correctly depending on

the type of cell phone you have.

.The ringtone that has been set in the

phone setting screen sounds when

there is an incoming call. Depending

on the type of Bluetooth phone, both

the system and Bluetooth phone may

sound simultaneously when there is an

incoming call. Refer to “Phone volume

settings”F5-79.

!By off/on hook switch

When you receive a call, you can also

answer it by pressing the off hook switch

on the steering wheel. To end a call, press

the on hook switch.

&Talking on the phone

The call screen opens when you perform

the following operations.

.When you accept a call on the incom-

ing call screen (by selecting the key),

the call screen opens.

.When you are on the outgoing call

screen, the screen changes to the call

screen when the other party answers the

call.

While talking on the phone, this screen is

displayed. The operations outlined below

can be performed on this screen.

.When the incoming call screen is

displayed and you accept the call, the

screen changes to the call screen. The

screen stays on the incoming call screen if

you reject the call.

.The and keys are disabled on

the incoming call screen.

Call screen

Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)

5-78

No. Function

1Open the “Options”screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings”F5-79.

Mute your voice to the other party.

Touch this key again to deactivate the

Mute mode. This key is disabled in the

private mode.

Change the mode to private mode.

The other party’s voice emits from the

cell phone. Touch this key again to

deactivate the private mode.

End the call. This will return you to the

phone (menu) screen when ending

outgoing calls and the previous

screen when ending incoming calls.

This function is the same as pressing

the on hook switch on the steering

wheel.

Open the call (dialpad) screen. For

details about how to use the function,

refer to “By Dialpad”F5-76.

6Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.

Allow you to make DTMF (Dual Tone

Multi Frequency) calls. The numbers

you enter are sent as tone signals.

NOTE

.When cell phone call is changed to

hands-free call, the hands-free screen

is displayed and its functions can be

operated on the screen.

.Changing between cell phone call

and hands-free call can be performed

by operating the cell phone directly.

.Transferring methods and opera-

tions will be different depending on

the type of cell phone you have.

.For the operation of the cell phone,

see the manual that comes with it.

.The sound quality of the voice heard

from the other party’s speaker may be

negatively impacted.

&Phone settings

You can transfer the phonebook informa-

tion and adjust the volume of your phone

using the Bluetooth phone system.

NOTE

.The ringer volume for outgoing and

incoming calls, as well as the volume

while on hold or during a call are

controlled independently from the vo-

lume of the audio source. The volume

setting in the phone setting is applied.

.When making a call, receiving a call

or while talking on the phone, you can

adjust the volume by using the power/

Volume knob on the audio panel or the

volume control switch on the steering

wheel.

!Phone volume settings

The call and ringtone volume can be

adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.

1. Display the “PHONE”screen. Refer to

“How to change the hands-free phone

system”F5-73.

2. Touch the key.

3. Select the desired item to be set.

.On the “PHONE”screen, the screen

changes to the “Options”screen when you

select the key.

Options (volume settings) screen

Audio/Hands–free phone system

–CONTINUED –

5-79

Audio/Hands–free phone system

No. Function

Adjust the ringtone volume. The “−”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume

levels)

Adjust the receive volume. The “−”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume

levels)

Adjust the transmit volume. The “−”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume

levels)

NOTE

.Depending on the type of phone,

certain functions may not be available.

.Contact data is managed indepen-

dently for every registered phone.

When one phone is connected, another

phone’s registered data cannot be

read.

!Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP

(Phone Book Access Profile) compatible

and PBAP incompatible but OPP (Object

Push Profile) compatible Bluetooth

phones.

1. Display the “PHONE”screen. Refer to

“How to change the hands-free phone

system”F5-73.

2. Touch the “Contacts”key, and then

select the “Download Contacts”key.

Contacts screen (Download selection)

No. Function

Open the download confirmation

screen. Confirm whether or not to

download. If the downloaded contact

(s) already

exist(s), confirm whether or not to

overwrite the existing data.

Download one set of contact data. To

download the data, you need to

operate from the connected device.

3Cancel the download. The screen

returns to the “Contacts”screen.

NOTE

.If your cell phone is neither PBAP

nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-

not be transferred.

.When you are transferring the con-

tacts data, you may have to operate the

cell phone, depending on the type of

cell phone.

.Depending on the type of cell phone,

some functions may not be supported.

!For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones

1. Select the “Download Contacts”or

“Download 1 Entry”key. Contacts are

transferred automatically.

2. Check that a confirmation screen is

displayed when the operation is complete.

.This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the type of cell phone.

.If another Bluetooth device is con-

nected when transferring contact data,

depending on the phone, the con-

nected Bluetooth device may need to

be disconnected.

5-80

!For PBAP incompatible but OPP

compatible Bluetooth phones

1. Select the “Download 1 Entry”key.

2. Transfer the contact data to the sys-

tem using a Bluetooth phone.

.This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the type of cell phone.

.To cancel this function, select the

“Cancel”key.

3. Check that a confirmation screen is

displayed when the operation is complete.

NOTE

To download all items, you may need to

change the settings in your cell phone

beforehand.

!Deleting the contact data

You can delete the phonebook data stored

in the audio set.

1. Display the “PHONE”screen. Refer to

“How to change the hands-free phone

system”F5-73.

2. Touch the “Contacts”key, and then

select the “Delete All”key.

3. Select the “OK”key when the con-

firmation screen appears.

NOTE

.Manual transfer operation cannot be

performed while driving.

.If your cell phone is neither PBAP

nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-

not be transferred.

.Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone:

–It may be necessary to perform

additional steps on the phone when

transferring contact data.

Voice command system

The voice command system enables the

audio, hands-free phone system, etc. to

be operated using voice commands.

Refer to the “Command list”F5-85 for

samples of voice commands.

Voice commands can be used even when

you set the system to another language.

For details about setting language, refer to

“General settings”F5-20.

Audio/Voice command system

–CONTINUED –

5-81

Audio/Voice command system

&Using the voice command

system

!Steering switch

1) Talk switch

Action Function

Press Start the voice com-

mand system.

Press and hold Cancel voice recogni-

tion.

!Microphone

1) Models without SUBARU STARLINK

2) Models with SUBARU STARLINK

(U.S.-spec. models only)

It is unnecessary to speak directly into the

microphone when giving a command.

NOTE

.Wait for the confirmation beep be-

fore speaking a command.

.Voice commands may not be recog-

nized if:

–Spoken too quickly.

–Spoken at a low or high volume.

–The moonroof or windows are

open.

–Passengers are talking while

voice commands are spoken.

–The air conditioning speed is set

high.

–The air conditioning vents are

turned towards the microphone.

.In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not recognize the command

properly and using voice commands

may not be possible:

–The command is incorrect or

unclear. Note that certain words,

accents or speech patterns may be

difficult for the system to recognize.

–There is excessive background

noise, such as wind noise.

5-82

&Voice command system op-

eration

1. Press the talk switch on the steering

wheel.

After the voice command top screen has

been displayed, speech guidance will

commence.

NOTE

When the voice command mode is

audio mode, voice guidance for the

voice command system can be skipped

by pressing the talk switch on the

steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Example (Say “PHONE”)

NOTE

.Commands related with each func-

tion are displayed on the screen of the

each function tab. Some commonly

used commands are displayed on the

screen of the main tab. Even if any tab

is selected, all commands can be

operated.

.Saying

“Help”

prompts guidance to

offer examples of commands and op-

eration methods.

.To cancel voice recognition, select

“6”, or press and hold the talk switch

on the steering wheel.

.If the system does not respond or

the confirmation screen does not dis-

appear, press the talk switch on the

steering wheel and try again.

.The notations used in the com-

mands are as follows.

–< >: Numbers, titles or names to

be spoken

!Voice command example: Call

name

1. Press the talk switch on the steering

wheel.

2. Say

“Call <contacts>”

.A confirmation screen will be dis-

played showing the recognition re-

sults. If multiple matching items are

found, a selection screen will be

displayed. Say

“<number>”

or select

the number.

NOTE

.In the same manner as it is dis-

played on the screen, “Call <con-

tacts>”, after saying

“Call a contact”

say the name of a contact. For exam-

ple:

“Call a contact”

“John Smith”

“Call a contact”

“Mary Davis”

.Short or abbreviated names in the

contacts list may not be recognized.

Change names in the contacts list to

full names.

.Sometimes a voice recognition re-

sult confirmation screen will be dis-

played. After confirming the result, say

Audio/Voice command system

–CONTINUED –

5-83

Audio/Voice command system

“Yes”

“No”

.When the system recognizes multi-

ple names from the contacts list, a

name candidate list will be displayed

on the screen. If the desired name is

not displayed on the top of the screen,

say or select the number of the name

from the candidate list (number 1,

number 2, etc.) to select a name from

the candidate list.

.When a contact has multiple phone

numbers registered in the contacts list,

a candidate list will be displayed. If the

desired phone number is not displayed

on the top of the screen, say or select

the number of the desired phone

number from the candidate list (num-

ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone

number from the candidate list.

!Voice command example: Dial

number

1. Press the talk switch on the steering

wheel.

2. Say

“Dial number”

3. Say

“Dial <number>”

For example, if the phone number is

2345678:

Say

“two three four five six seven

eight”

Do not say

“twenty three forty five sixty

seven eight”

4. Say

“Dial”

or press the off hook switch

on the steering wheel.

NOTE

.When the system recognizes multi-

ple phone numbers, a phone number

candidate list will be displayed on the

screen. Pressing the off hook switch on

the steering wheel makes a call to the

top entry on the list. If the desired

phone number is not displayed on the

top of the screen, say the number of

the desired phone number from the

candidate list to select a phone number

from the candidate list.

.Calling to the following phone num-

bers

–3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)

–7 digit numbers (Local phone

numbers)

–10 digit numbers (Area code +

Local phone number)

–11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area

code + Local phone number)

.As the system cannot recognize

additional numbers, say the complete

number without stopping.

!Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recogni-

tion technology, this system enables re-

cognition of a command when spoken

naturally. However, the system cannot

recognize every variation of each com-

mand. In some situations, it is possible to

omit the command for the procedure and

directly state the desired operation. Not all

voice commands are displayed in the

function menu.

NOTE

If the command cannot be recognized

completely, the command input screen

will be displayed. (Search results will

be shown based on the part of the

command that was recognized.)

!Expression examples for each

function

Command Expression examples

“Dial <phone num-

ber>”

Phone <phone num-

ber>.

5-84

&Command list

Recognizable voice commands and their

actions are shown below.

NOTE

.Some voice commands may not be

available depending on the market,

vehicle specifications or the device

connection status.

.Frequently used commands are

listed in the following tables.

.For devices that are not installed in

the vehicle, the related commands will

not be displayed on the screen. Also,

according to conditions, other com-

mands may not be displayed on the

screen.

.The functions available may vary

according to the system installed.

.Voice recognition language can be

changed. Refer to “Unit settings”F5-

19.

.The notations used in the com-

mands are as follows.

–<>: Numbers, titles or

names to be spoken

–(): There is no need to

speak the command, the voice

command system will recognize

the content.

!Basic command

Voice command Function

Back

Go back one hierar-

chy or cancel the

voice recognition

(voice command top

screen)

Help Ask for help with the

current task

Cancel, Close Cancel the current

task

Yes

Display OFF Turns the display off

Audio ON Turns the audio sys-

tem on

Audio OFF Turns the audio sys-

tem off

STARLINK Switch to APPS mode

!Commands for changing the audio

mode

Voice command Function

Change to AM Switch to AM mode

Change to AM1 Switch to AM mode

band 1

Change to AM2 Switch to AM mode

band 2

Change to FM Switch to FM mode

Change to FM1 Switch to FM mode

band 1

Change to FM2 Switch to FM mode

band 2

Change to FM3 Switch to FM mode

band 3

Change to SiriusXM Switch to XM mode

Change to BT Audio Switch to Bluetooth

Audio mode

Change to CD Switch to CD mode

Change to USB Switch to USB mode

Change to iPod Switch to iPod mode

Change to aha Switch to aha radio

mode

Change to Pandora Switch to Pandora

mode

Change to AUX Switch to AUX mode

Audio/Voice command system

–CONTINUED –

5-85

Audio/Voice command system

!Commands for hands-free phone

Voice command Function

Dial Number ?<0-9,

+, *, #> ?Change

number, Dial Places a call to the

said phone number

Dial <0-9, +, *, #> ?

Change number, Dial

Contacts, Phonebook

?<Name> ?<1-5>

?Dial Make a call by using

the phonebook

Call <Name> ?

<1-5> ?Dial

Call History ?In-

coming call, Outgoing

call ?Next (page),

Previous (page) ?

<1-5> ?Dial

Make a call by using

the call history

Incoming Calls Display the call his-

tory screen

Outgoing Calls Display the call his-

tory screen

Redial

Places a call to the

phone number of the

latest outgoing call

Callback

Places a call to the

phone number of the

latest incoming call

Select Phone ?

<1-5>

Display the phone

select screen

Phone Menu Display the hands

free top screen

!Commands for Pandora

Voice command Function

Like Mark “Like”flag

Dislike Mark “Dislike”flag

Skip, Next Skip to the next song

!Commands for aha

Voice command Function

Thumbs Up, Heart,

Like Mark “Like”flag

Thumbs Down, Ban,

Dislike Mark “Dislike”flag

Refresh, update

Refresh the selected

station to get the lat-

est information

Content Up Playback next Con-

tent

Content Down Playback previous

Content

!Commands for AM/FM control

Voice command Function

Seek Up Tunes in the higher

frequency direction

Seek Down Tunes in the lower

frequency direction

Scan Switch to the scan

mode

Tune to <Frequency>

Designate the fre-

quency to switch to a

specific radio station

Preset <preset num-

ber>

Designate the preset

channel to switch to

specific radio station

Tag iTunes Tagging for

HD Radio

5-86

!Commands for SiriusXM radio con-

trol

Voice command Function

Preset <preset num-

ber>

Designate the preset

channel to switch to

specific radio station

Scan Switch to the scan

mode

Channel <Channel

number>

Designate the chan-

nel to switch to spe-

cific radio station

Category ?Next

(page), Previous

(page), <1-5> ?Next

(page), Previous

(page), <1-5>

Displays the category

list screen

!Commands for CD control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current

track

Scan Switch to the scan

mode

Repeat ?1 Track

Repeat, Repeat All Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle Plays randomly

!Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC,

USB control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current

track

Folder Up Plays from the start of

the next folder

Folder Down Plays from the start of

the previous folder

Scan Switch to the scan

mode

Repeat ?1 Track

Repeat, Repeat

Folder, Repeat All

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat Folder Repeat of the folder

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle ?Shuffle

Folder, Shuffle All

Select a random play

mode

Shuffle Folder Plays randomly of the

folder

Shuffle All Plays randomly

!Commands for iPod Control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current

track

Repeat ?Repeat

One, Repeat All Select a repeat mode

Repeat One Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle ?Shuffle

Track, Shuffle Album,

Shuffle OFF

Select a random play

mode

Shuffle Track Shuffle all tracks

Shuffle Album Shuffle all tracks

Shuffle OFF Turn off shuffle

Audio/Voice command system

–CONTINUED –

5-87

Audio/Voice command system

!Commands for Bluetooth audio

control

Voice command Function

Pause Pause play

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down Select the current

track

Repeat ?1 track

Repeat, Repeat All,

Group Repeat

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Group Repeat Repeat tracks on

group

Shuffle ?Shuffle All,

Group Shuffle, Shuf-

fle OFF

Select a random play

mode

Shuffle All Shuffle all tracks

Group Shuffle Shuffle tracks on

group

Shuffle OFF Turn off shuffle

5-88

What to do if...

&Troubleshooting

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

The hands-free system or Bluetooth

device does not work.

The connected device may not be a

compatible Bluetooth cell phone.

For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the

USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm

whether or not the device can be paired with

the vehicle.

*—

The Bluetooth version of the connected

cell phone may be older than the

specified version.

Use a cell phone with Bluetooth version 1.1 or

higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or

higher).

*5-68

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

Audio/What to do if...

–CONTINUED –

5-89

Audio/What to do if...

When registering/connecting a cell phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

A cell phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered

on the cell phone. Enter the correct passcode on the cell phone. * —

The registration operation has not

been completed on the cell phone

side.

Complete the registration operation on the cell

phone (approve registration on the phone). *—

Old registration information remains

on either this system or the cell

phone.

Delete the existing registration information from

both this system and the cell phone, then register

the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.

*5-69

A Bluetooth connection cannot be

made.

Another Bluetooth device is already

connected.

Manually connect the cell phone you wish to use to

this system. —5-69

Bluetooth function is not enabled on

the cell phone. Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone. * —

Automatic Bluetooth connection on

this system is set to off.

Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system

to on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “ON”position.

—5-69

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

5-90

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

Phonebook data cannot be trans-

ferred manually.

The profile version of the connected cell

phone may not be compatible with

transferring phonebook data.

For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the

USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm

whether or not the device can be paired with

the vehicle.

*—

Transfer operation on the cell phone has

not completed.

Complete transfer operation on the cell phone

(approve transfer operation on the phone). *—

Phonebook data cannot be edited. Editing function is not available on this

system. ——

5-79

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

Audio/What to do if...

–CONTINUED –

5-91

Audio/What to do if...

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

Even though all conceivable mea-

sures have been taken, the symptom

status does not change.

The cell phone is not close enough to

this system. Bring the cell phone closer to this system. ——

The cell phone is the most likely cause

of the symptom.

Turn the cell phone off, remove and reinstall

the battery pack, and then restart the cell

phone.

*—

Enable the cell phone’s Bluetooth connection. * —

Stop the cell phone’s security software and

close all applications. *—

Before using an application installed on the

cell phone, carefully check its source and how

its operation might affect this system.

*—

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

5-92

Appendix

&Certification

.Bluetooth

The Bluetooth word mark and logo are

registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion

Co., Ltd. is under license.

.SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if

equipped)

SiriusXM

and all related marks and

logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio

.Pandora (if equipped)

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other

Pandora marks are trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc.,

or its subsidiaries worldwide.

If you have any issues with the Pandora

application on your mobile phone, please

direct them to

pandora-support@pandora.com.

.iPod

“Made for iPod”and “Made for iPhone”

mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to

iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to meet Apple

performance standards. Apple is not

responsible for the operation of this device

or its compliance with safety and regula-

tory standards. Please note that the use of

this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,

iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

.How to get the source code using

the open source

This system implements software using

the open source. For customers who

would like to get the source code of the

software, it is available by downloading it

from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd.

For details, refer to the following web site.

http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/in-

dex.html

&Certification for the Hands-

free system

.U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Audio/Appendix

–CONTINUED –

5-93

Audio/Appendix

.Canada-spec. models

This transmitter must not be co-located or

operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

&Certification for Mexico mod-

els

.IFETEL RCPCLPF14-250

Clarion PF-3547

.IFETEL RCPCLPF14-253

Clarion PF-3688

5-94

Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light .................................................. 6-2

Map lights ........................................................... 6-3

OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4

Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4

Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-5

Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-6

Glove box ........................................................... 6-6

Center console.................................................... 6-6

Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-7

Cup holders ......................................................... 6-7

Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-7

Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) ........... 6-8

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9

Accessory power outlets.................................... 6-9

Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped) ............. 6-11

Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-11

Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-12

Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13

Convenient hook................................................ 6-13

Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-14

Using the cover ................................................. 6-14

To install the front cover .................................... 6-14

To remove the front cover .................................. 6-14

To remove the cover housing............................. 6-15

Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-15

To install the cover housing ............................... 6-16

Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-16

Under-floor storage compartment (if

equipped) ........................................................ 6-17

Rear view camera .............................................. 6-17

How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-18

Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-19

Help line............................................................ 6-20

Interior equipment

Interior equipment/Interior lights

Interior lights

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are turned off to

avoid battery discharge.

&Dome light

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following

three positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.

OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically in the following cases.

.Any of the doors or the rear gate is

opened.

.The doors or the rear gate are un-

locked using the keyless access function

(if equipped). Refer to “Locking and

unlocking with “keyless access”entry

function”F2-13.

.The doors or the rear gate are un-

locked using the remote keyless entry

system. Refer to “Remote keyless entry

system”F2-21.

.The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC”position to the “LOCK”/“OFF”posi-

tion.

&Cargo area light

1) ON

2) OFF

ON: The light illuminates when the rear

gate is opened. The light remains illumi-

nated for several seconds and gradually

turns off after the rear gate is closed.

OFF: The light remains off.

6-2

&Map lights

1) Map light switch (lens)

To turn on the map light, push the lens.

To turn it off, push the lens again.

!Door interlock switch

1) Door interlock switch

Although the map light switches (lenses)

are in the OFF position (manually off), the

map lights can be set to illuminate auto-

matically in conjunction with a door open-

ing, etc. by use of the door interlock

switch. The door interlock switch has the

following positions.

OFF: The map lights do not illuminate

automatically in conjunction with a door

opening. However, the lights can be

turned on manually by pushing the map

light switches (lenses).

DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-

matically in the following cases.

.Any of the doors other than the rear

gate is opened. (The map lights do not

illuminate when only the rear gate is

opened.)

.The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function (if equipped).

Refer to “Locking and unlocking with

“keyless access”entry function”F2-13.

.The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system”F2-21.

.The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC”position to the “LOCK”/“OFF”posi-

tion.

&OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

.dome light

.map light

.cargo area light

After being illuminated automatically,

these lights remain on for several seconds

and then gradually turn off under the

following conditions.

.after all doors and the rear gate are

closed (dome light)

.after all doors are closed (map light)

.after the rear gate is closed (cargo area

light)

While the lights are illuminated, if any of

the following operations are performed,

Interior equipment/Interior lights

–CONTINUED –

6-3

Interior equipment/Sun visors

the lights turn off immediately.

.The ignition switch is turned from the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position to the “ACC”or

“ON”position.

.All doors and the rear gate are locked

using the keyless access function (if

equipped).

.All doors and the rear gate are locked

using the remote keyless entry system.

The setting for the period of time in which

the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for details. For

models with multi function display, the

setting can be changed by operating the

multi function display. For details, refer to

“Interior light off delay timer setting”F3-

84.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

&Sun visor extension plate

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the sun visor

extension plate to prevent glare through

the gap between the sun visor and center

pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it

toward the rear of the vehicle. When you

have finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

6-4

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would obstruct your view of the

rearview mirror.

&Vanity mirror

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being temporarily blinded by the

glare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

&Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being distracted by the light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Interior equipment/Sun visors 6-5

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

Storage compartment

CAUTION

.Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

.Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

&Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,

insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

&Center console

The center console box provides a sto-

rage space.

1) Coin tray

2) Accessory tray

3) Card holder

The lid located inside the center console

canbeusedasacointrayoran

accessory tray for small items. There is a

card holder on the reverse side of the lid.

When the lid inside the center console is

removed, you can use a pen holder.

6-6

1) Paper holder (if equipped)

2) Pen holder

The top of the console can be used as an

armrest.

For some models, the armrest is adjus-

table. Slide the armrest to the desired

position.

&Overhead console (if

equipped)

To open the console, push on the console

lid lightly. The lid will automatically open.

CAUTION

.Before driving, ensure that the

overhead console is closed.

.When your vehicle is parked in

the sun or on a warm day, the

inside of the overhead console

heats up. Avoid storing plastic or

other heat-vulnerable or flam-

mable articles such as a lighter

in the overhead console.

Cup holders

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,

if hot, might burn you and/or your

passengers. Spilled beverages may

also damage upholstery, carpets or

audio equipment.

&Front passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION

Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an accident.

Interior equipment/Cup holders

–CONTINUED –

6-7

Interior equipment/Cup holders

A dual cup holder is built into the console.

The divider in the cup holder can be pulled

out.

NOTE

.The shape of the front passenger’s

cup holder may be slightly different

depending on the model.

.With the divider taken out, the cup

holder can be used as a storage box.

&Rear passenger’s cup holder

(if equipped)

CAUTION

When a cup in the rear passenger’s

cup holder contains a beverage, do

not fold down the rear seatback.

Otherwise, the beverage could spill

and, if the beverage is hot, it could

burn you and/or your passengers.

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

6-8

Bottle holders

CAUTION

.Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

.When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could burn

you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold a beverage bottle

and other items.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet below the climate control

Power outlet in the center console

Interior equipment/Bottle holders

–CONTINUED –

6-9

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

Power outlet in the cargo area

Accessory power outlets are provided

below the climate control dials, in the

center console and in the cargo area.

Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery

is available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is in either the “ACC”or

“ON”position.

Youcanuseanin-vehicleelectrical

appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120W.Do

not use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not

exceed 120W.

CAUTION

.Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlets.

.Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

.Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must not

exceed 120W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

.If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

.Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

.Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord

on your electrical appliance will

not interfere with your shifting

gears and operating the accel-

erator and brake pedals. If they

do, do not use the electrical

appliance while driving.

6-10

NOTE

When the lid of the center console is

closed, an opening remains between

the center console and the lid to allow

the power outlet in the center console

to be used. Pass the cord of the

electrical appliance through this open-

ing.

&Use with a cigarette lighter (if

equipped)

To use the accessory power outlet as a

cigarette lighter socket, purchase the

cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional

accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is

available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON”or “ACC”

position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will

automatically spring up when ready for

use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the

heating element. Doing so could

result in injury and could also

damage the heating element.

CAUTION

.Do not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

.The electrical power socket is

originally designed to use a gen-

uine SUBARU cigarette lighter

plug. Do not use a non-genuine

cigarette lighter plug in the sock-

et. Doing so may cause a short-

circuit and overheating, resulting

in a fire.

.If the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the

portion of the socket’s internal

mechanism that causes a cigar-

ette lighter plug to “pop out”

after its lighter element is heated.

Therefore, do not place a cigar-

ette lighter plug in a socket that

has been used, even once, to

power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick

and overheat, creating a potential

fire hazard.

Ashtray (if equipped)

CAUTION

.Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This

could cause a fire.

.Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

.Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

.Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

Interior equipment/Ashtray

–CONTINUED –

6-11

Interior equipment/Floor mat

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

holders”F6-7. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders”F6-

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Floor mat (if equipped)

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

.Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-

lent designed with grommets in

the correct locations.

.Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed in its proper loca-

tion and is correctly secured on

its retaining pins.

.Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

6-12

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

Convenient hook

CAUTION

.Do not hang items on the con-

venient hook that weigh 6 lbs (3

kg) or more. Depending on the

conditions of use (for example, in

low temperatures, etc.), the rear

gate may lower even with lighter

loads. However, this is not a

malfunction. Be careful not to

hit your head or other body parts.

.When using the convenient hook,

do not try to close the rear gate.

Doing so may cause the item on

the hook to be jammed in the rear

gate and damaged. Remove the

item from the hook before clos-

ing the rear gate.

A convenient hook is attached to the rear

gate trim. When the rear gate is open, you

can hang a candle lantern, wet suit, etc.

on the hook.

Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook 6-13

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover

Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

&Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear

gate stays while extending and

rewinding the cover. Scratches on

the stays could cause leakage of

gas from the stays, which may

result in their inability to hold the

rear gate open.

&To install the front cover

CAUTION

For models with a rear seat reclining

mechanism, when reclining the rear

seatback, move the front cover

backward so that the cover is not

damaged.

1. Align the right side of the front cover

with the triangle mark before fixing the

cover in place.

2. Push the front cover to the right side

and shorten the bar.

3. Align the left side of the front cover

with the triangle mark before fixing the

cover in place.

&To remove the front cover

1. Push the front cover to the right side

and shorten the bar.

2. Remove the front cover.

6-14

&To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten it.

3. Take it off the retainer.

&Stowage of the cargo area

cover

The cargo area cover can be stowed in

under the cargo floor.

1. Pull the strap to open the center part of

the cargo floor lid, and then remove the lid.

2. Remove the left and right parts of the

cargo floor lid.

3. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover

–CONTINUED –

6-15

Interior equipment/Cargo tie–down hooks

&To install the cover housing

1. Insert the protrusion located on the

right end of the sleeve into the recess of

the retainer.

2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten the bar.

3. Insert the other protrusion into the

recess of the other retainer.

Cargo tie-down hooks

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the front tie-down hooks, turn

them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that

exceeds the capacity of the hooks.

The maximum load capacity is 44

lbs (20 kg) per hook.

6-16

Under-floor storage compart-

ment (if equipped)

NOTE

The shape of the storage compartment

may be different depending on the

model.

The storage compartment is located under

the floor of the cargo area and can be

used to store small items. Pull the strap to

open the center part of the cargo floor lid,

and then remove the lid.

CAUTION

.Always keep the lids closed while

driving to reduce the risk of

injury in the event of a sudden

stop or an accident.

.Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

Rear view camera

A rear view camera is attached to the rear

gate. When the ignition switch is “ON”and

the shift lever (MT models) or select lever

(CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view

camera automatically displays the rear

view image behind the vehicle on the

monitor of the navigation system or the

audio display.

WARNING

.Since the rear view camera uses

a wide-angle lens, the image on

the monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

.Since the range and field of view

of the image on the monitor is

Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment

–CONTINUED –

6-17

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

limited, you should always check

the rear view and the surround-

ing area with your eyes and

mirrors, and move backward at

a slow speed. Moving backward

only by checking the rear view

image from the camera could

cause an accident.

.Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell

a strange odor, stop using the

rear view camera immediately.

Contact your SUBARU dealer

for an inspection. Continued use

may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

CAUTION

.If your vehicle is washed with a

high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to contact the camera

directly. Entry of water into the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

.Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

.If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful when removing it.

Otherwise, damage to the camera

may cause a fire or electric

shock. Pour water or lukewarm

water over the camera to remove

mud and ice, and wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

.Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

.When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse with a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

.If the rear view camera is used for

a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

.Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with a

cloth moistened with a diluted neutral

detergent and then wipe it with a soft,

dry cloth.

.When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If it

comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

.The camera lens has a hard coating

to help prevent scratches. However,

when washing the vehicle or cleaning

the camera lens, be careful not to

scratch the camera lens. Do not use a

washing brush directly on the camera

lens. The image quality of the rear view

camera may deteriorate.

.Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop vertical lines around

the light source. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

.Under fluorescent light, the display

may flicker. However, this is not a

malfunction.

.The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the

actual color of the objects.

&How to use the rear view

camera

When the shift lever/select lever is set to

“R”, the rear view camera automatically

displays the rear view image from the

vehicle. When the lever is set to other

positions, the image before setting to “R”

is displayed.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

6-18

2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.

NOTE

.For models with the genuine

SUBARU navigation or audio system,

while the navigation system is acti-

vated, the image of the rear view

camera will not be displayed. However,

the image of the rear view camera has

priority over other screen displays.

.The image of the rear view camera

has priority over other screen displays.

.The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle rearview mirror or the

side view mirror.

.It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of the

camera.

–The vehicle is used for towing or

a trailer hitch is installed.

–The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

–The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

–An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera sticks

to the lens of the camera.

–Strong light shined directly on

the camera lens (occasionally, there

are vertical lines on the screen).

&Viewing range on the screen

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

–CONTINUED –

6-19

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

Also, the image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a

wide projection on its upper part such as a

sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

&Help line

The help line (distance marker and vehicle

width line) is a guide to help you realize

the actual distance from the screen image.

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

4) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

5) Vehicle centerline

When the shift lever/select lever is set to

position “R”, the monitor screen displays

the help lines together with the rear view

image.

CAUTION

.When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

.The actual position may be dif-

ferent from the indication of the

help lines.

.Differences may occur due to

number of passengers or loaded

cargo.

.When the vehicle is on a slope or

when the vehicle is inclined

against the road, the indication

is different from the actual posi-

tion.

.Be sure to observe the displayed

warning message “Check Sur-

roundings Before Backing Up”.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R”range shortly

after turning on the ignition switch, the

warning message “Check Surround-

ings Before Backing Up”may not be

displayed. Wait for several seconds or

more after turning on the ignition

switch before shifting to the “R”range.

Then the warning message will be

6-20

displayed.

!Difference between screen image

and actual road

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

!When there is an upward slope at

the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

!When there is a downward slope

at the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

thantheactualdistanceasinan

upward slope.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

–CONTINUED –

6-21

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

!Feature of distance marker

1) 3 feet (1 m) line

2) 10 feet (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or other object

close behind, distance cannot be correctly

displayed.

6-22

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3

Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7

Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8

Starting and stopping the engine (models

without push-button start system).................. 7-9

Starting engine.................................................... 7-9

Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11

Starting and stopping engine (models with

push-button start system) .............................. 7-12

Safety precautions ............................................. 7-12

Operating range for push-button start

system............................................................. 7-12

Starting engine................................................... 7-12

Stopping engine................................................. 7-13

When access key fob does not operate

properly ........................................................... 7-14

Remote engine start system (dealer

option).............................................................. 7-14

Models with “keyless access with push-button

start system”................................................... 7-15

Models without “keyless access with push-button

start system”................................................... 7-16

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote

start................................................................. 7-19

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start

shutdown......................................................... 7-19

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the

vehicle ............................................................. 7-19

Service mode (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)........................ 7-19

Remote transmitter program (models without

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).......................................................... 7-20

System maintenance.......................................... 7-20

Certification for remote engine starter ................ 7-22

Manual transmission ......................................... 7-22

Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-23

Driving tips........................................................ 7-24

Continuously variable transmission................. 7-25

Select lever ....................................................... 7-26

Selection of manual mode (if equipped).............. 7-28

Selection of “L”(if equipped) ............................. 7-30

Shift lock function ............................................. 7-30

Driving tips........................................................ 7-32

SI-DRIVE (if equipped)....................................... 7-32

Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-32

Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-33

Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-33

SI-DRIVE switches ............................................. 7-34

Power steering................................................... 7-35

Braking ............................................................... 7-36

Braking tips....................................................... 7-36

Brake system .................................................... 7-36

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-37

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-37

ABS self-check .................................................. 7-38

ABS warning light.............................................. 7-38

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-38

Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-39

Starting and operating

Vehicle Dynamics Control system .................... 7-40

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-41

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-41

X-mode (if equipped).......................................... 7-43

To activate/deactivate the X-mode....................... 7-44

Hill descent control function............................... 7-45

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-47

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-48

Parking brake..................................................... 7-48

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-49

Hill start assist system ...................................... 7-50

To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist

system............................................................. 7-52

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF

indicator light................................................... 7-53

Cruise control (if equipped)............................... 7-54

To set cruise control .......................................... 7-54

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-56

To turn off the cruise control .............................. 7-56

To change the cruising speed............................. 7-56

Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-58

Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-58

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) .................................... 7-59

System features................................................. 7-59

System operation............................................... 7-61

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

buzzer ............................................................. 7-62

BSD/RCTA warning indicator.............................. 7-64

BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 7-65

Certification for the BSD/RCTA........................... 7-66

Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-67

Reverse Automatic Braking System (if

equipped) ........................................................ 7-67

Reverse Automatic Braking System overview ..... 7-68

Operating conditions ......................................... 7-69

Reverse Automatic Braking System

operation......................................................... 7-71

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system

operation......................................................... 7-74

Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF

setting............................................................. 7-74

RAB warning indicator ....................................... 7-75

Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 7-75

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause damage to the

engine and/or fuel system.

&Fuel requirements

!Non-turbo models

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

!Turbo models

The engine is designed to operate at

maximum performance using unleaded

gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI

(98 RON) or higher. Unleaded gasoline

with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON)

or higher may be used with no detriment to

engine durability or driveability. However,

you may notice a slight decrease in

maximum engine performance while using

91 AKI (95 RON) fuel.

Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher may

also be used. Using regular unleaded

gasoline will not be detrimental to engine

durability, nor will it affect your warranty

coverage. However, depending on your

driving habits and conditions, you may

notice a decrease in maximum engine

performance, fuel economy or slight en-

gine vibration or knocking. If you experi-

ence any of these conditions while using a

lower octane rated fuel, you may want to

return to using 91 AKI (95 RON) octane

rated fuel as soon as possible. Addition-

ally, if your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently, or if you are driving with

heavy loads such as when towing a trailer,

the use of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher

grade unleaded gasoline is required.

!Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact

your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with

the specified octane rating and your

vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

!RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

!AKI

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

!Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

!Gasoline for California-certified

LEV

If your vehicle was certified to California’s

low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as

indicated on the underhood tune-up label,

it is designed to optimize engine and

emission performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than California, your

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

Starting and operating/Fuel

–CONTINUED –

7-3

Starting and operating/Fuel

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service.

!MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

!Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in

your vehicle, but should contain no more

than 10% ethanol for the proper operation

of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 10% ethanol, including from

any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85

(which are only some examples of fuel

containing more than 10% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following description.

.Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

.Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

.If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

.Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be sure

to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled fuel

is not covered under the SUBARU

Limited Warranty.

7-4

&Fuel filler lid and cap

!Refueling

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor

at the left of the driver’s seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any

static electricity that may be present

on your body. If your body is carry-

ing an electrostatic charge, there is

a possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

.Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

first stop the engine and close all

vehicle doors and windows.

Make sure that there are no

lighted cigarettes, open flames

or electrical sparks in the adja-

cent area. Only handle fuel out-

doors. Quickly wipe up any

spilled fuel.

.When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the

Starting and operating/Fuel

–CONTINUED –

7-5

Starting and operating/Fuel

left. Do not remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pres-

sure and spray out of the fuel

filler neck, especially in hot

weather. If you hear a hissing

sound while you are removing

the cap, wait for the sound to

stop and then slowly open the

cap to prevent fuel from spraying

out and creating a fire hazard.

3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

.When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

.Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,

rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the

painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

.You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

.If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK

ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-

dicator light”F3-16.

CAUTION

.Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

.After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could

occur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

.Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

.Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

7-6

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

.Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank

could cause damage to the en-

gine. Continuing to operate your

vehicle at an extremely low fuel

level may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single

two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in uncon-

trolled vehicle movement and may

cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

.At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

.Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspec-

tion of the OBDII system.

.The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE”warning light/mal-

function indicator light (MIL) and an

examination of the OBDII system with an

electronic scan tool.

.A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE”warning light is ob-

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)

–CONTINUED –

7-7

Starting and operating/Preparing to drive

served, there are no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness

monitors are all complete.

.A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE”warning light is not

properly operating (light is illuminated or is

not working due to a burned out bulb) or

there is one or more diagnostic trouble

codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.

.A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT

READY”is greater than one. If the

vehicle’s battery has been recently re-

placed or disconnected, the OBDII system

inspection may indicate that the vehicle is

not ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to reset the readiness monitors and

return for an emission re-inspection.

.Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks and check that no small animal is

under the vehicle.

4. Check that no small animal enters the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

7-8

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment and under the vehicle

before starting the engine.

NOTE

.Engine oil, engine coolant, brake

fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

.When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-

ler hitch (dealer option)”F8-16.

Starting and stopping the

engine (models without

push-button start system)

&Starting engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

NOTE

It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON”position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

!General precautions when starting

engine

WARNING

.Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle. It may result in

an accident.

.Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

.Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flam-

mable substances. The exhaust

pipe and exhaust emissions can

create a fire hazard at high

temperatures.

CAUTION

.If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)

–CONTINUED –

7-9

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)

.When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

.Avoid racing and rapid acceleration

immediately after the engine has

started.

.Until the engine is warmed up

sufficiently, the engine speed will be

maintained high. The engine speed will

decrease as the engine warms up.

.On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel used and the driving condition

(repeated short trips when the engine

has not warmed up sufficiently). In

such cases, it is recommended to

switch to a different brand of fuel.

.On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly

such as a rapid start-up and a rapid

acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

.The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and rear

window defogger are turned off.

.Do not shift the select lever (CVT

models) or shift lever (MT models)

while the starter is cranking.

!MT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor

and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold

the clutch pedal to the floor while starting

the engine.

The starter motor will only operate when

the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the

floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights”F3-13.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF”position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START”position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “OFF”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START”position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “OFF”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START”position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically decreases the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

!CVT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P”or “N”

position (preferably the “P”position).

The starter motor will only operate when

the select lever is at the “P”or “N”position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

7-10

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights”F3-13.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF”position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START”position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “OFF”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START”position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “OFF”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START”position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically decreases the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the select lever is at the “P”or

“N”position and that the parking brake is

applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N”position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P”posi-

tion.

&Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK”position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system) 7-11

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

Starting and stopping engine

(models with push-button

start system)

&Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions”F2-10.

&Operating range for push-

button start system

Refer to “Operating range for push-button

start system”F3-6.

&Starting engine

WARNING

.There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “Starting engine”

F7-9.

.If the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

CAUTION

.When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be

a malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

.If the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch is flashing

in green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. Depress the brake

pedal while moving the steering

wheel to the right and left, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

.Do not continue pressing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop

pressing the push-button ignition

switch. Instead, press the push-

button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to

switch the power status to

“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and

then press the push-button igni-

tion switch to start the engine.

NOTE

.When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the engine starter

operates for a maximum of 10 seconds

and after starting the engine, the starter

stops automatically.

.When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the engine can be

started regardless of the status of the

push-button ignition switch.

.If the security indicator light illumi-

nates when you attempt to start the

engine but the engine does not start,

press the push-button ignition switch

to switch the power to “OFF”and then

try to start the engine again.

.If the engine does not start, press

the push-button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to switch

the power to “OFF”. Then, while de-

pressing the brake pedal more force-

fully, press the push-button ignition

switch.

.The engine start procedures may

not function depending on the radio

wave conditions around the vehicle. In

such a case, refer to “Starting engine”

F9-18.

7-12

.If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the steering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

.Until the engine is warmed up

sufficiently, the engine speed will be

maintained high. The engine speed will

decrease as the engine warms up.

.Do not shift the select lever while the

starter is cranking.

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the brake pedal,

the engine will start. The starting proce-

dure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position. The engine can also start when

the select lever is in the “N”position,

however, for safety reasons, start in the

“P”position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When starting

with the select lever in the “N”position, the

indicator does not turn green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

.While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

.In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure,

move the select lever to the “P”posi-

tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.

Depress the brake pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

.When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine.

&Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

WARNING

.Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

–The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

–The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake

booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required

on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

–CONTINUED –

7-13

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

force will be required to steer,

and it may result in an accident.

.If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe location, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

.Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P”position.

.If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P”position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine during

driving except in an emergency.

&When access key fob does

not operate properly

Refer to “Access key fob –if access key

fob does not operate properly”F9-17.

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

WARNING

.There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General precau-

tions when starting engine”F7-

.Do not remote start a vehicle in

an enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of Carbon

Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of Carbon Monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

.Before performing any servicing

of the vehicle, temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent the

system from unexpectedly start-

ing the engine.

The remote engine start system allows

7-14

you to start the engine from outside the

vehicle. In addition, the remote engine

start system can activate the heater or air

conditioner, providing you with a comfor-

table cabin upon entry.

&Models with “keyless access

with push-button start sys-

tem”

NOTE

For more details, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the remote

engine start system.

Access key fob

1) Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the

remote engine start transmitter. Operate

the lock button to start or stop the engine

as follows.

!Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

.The select lever is in the “P”position.

.All doors including the rear gate are

closed.

.The engine hood is closed.

.The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF”position.

!Starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock

button briefly again. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

!Stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

!Automatic engine shutdown

The remote engine start system will

automatically shut down or will not start

the engine under the following conditions.

.The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

.Any door or the rear gate is opened.

.The select lever is moved to any

position other than “P”.

.The engine hood is opened.

.Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis

pressed.

.The brake pedal is depressed.

.The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or

more.

The time setting until the engine auto-

matically stops can be changed. To

change it, please contact your SUBARU

dealer. Note that some settings may

violate state, provincial, or local laws and

regulations. Check the laws in your area to

determine which setting is permitted.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

–CONTINUED –

7-15

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

&Models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

1) Fob button

!Starting the engine

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate)

and the engine hood must be closed

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. Any open entry point will

prevent starting or cause the engine to

stop.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the

start request is received, the following

phenomena will occur.

.The fob flashes and beeps once.

.The horn sounds once.

.The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is

too far away from the vehicle), the fob will

indicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following phenomena will occur.

.The fob flashes and beeps twice.

.The horn sounds once.

.The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following phe-

nomena will occur.

.The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

.The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

.The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a vehicle

malfunction is preventing starting. If the

engine does not start after 3 additional

attempts, the remote engine start request

will be aborted.

!Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

!Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the following

conditions is detected. In addition, the fob

will flash and beep 3 times.

.The brake pedal is depressed

.A key is in the ignition switch

.The engine hood is open

.The remote start system “Service

mode”is engaged

.The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

7-16

RPM

.The security alarm is triggered

.The select lever is not in the “P”

position

If the system detects any door (including

the rear gate) open during operation, it will

prevent starting or stop the engine, and

sound the horn and flash side marker

lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6

times.

In addition to the items above, if the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

.If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activation

(the security indicator light on the

combination meter is flashing), the

alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

.If the alarm system is disarmed at

the time of remote engine starter

activation (the security indicator light

on the combination meter is not flash-

ing), the alarm system will remain

disarmed throughout the remote start

run cycle.

!Remote start operation - fob con-

firmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate status of the system

using the following flash and beep se-

quences, provided the fob is within opera-

tional range of the system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

–CONTINUED –

7-17

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

Precondition Fob Indication Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is

held down —The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec —Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

2 long flashes —Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation

1 flash every 3 sec —Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety

reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and

holding fob button for at least 2 sec.

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

7-18

&Entering the vehicle while it

is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function (if equipped) or

remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-

cle’s doors are unlocked manually using

the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will

trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior

to activating the remote engine start

system) and the engine will turn off.

Perform either of the following procedures

to disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Alarm system”F2-25.

.Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “ON”position (models

without “keyless access with push-

button start system”)

.Turn the push-button ignition switch

to the “ACC”or “ON”position (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”)

.Press any button on the access key

fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle.

3. The engine will shut down when any

door or rear gate is opened.

4. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, insert the

key into the ignition switch and turn to the

“START”position to restart the engine. For

models with “keyless access with push-

button start system”, press the push-

button ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal to restart the engine.

&Entering the vehicle follow-

ing remote engine start shut-

down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

&Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting

and operation. After the system starts the

engine, the heater or air conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

&Service mode (models with-

out “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

In service mode, the remote engine start

function is temporarily disabled to prevent

the system from unexpectedly starting the

engine while being serviced.

To engage or disengage service mode:

1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle

doors and the rear gate.

2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”

position (CVT models)

3. Depress and hold the brake pedal

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position

5. Press and release the remote engine

start transmitter “”button three times.

The system will honk the vehicle’s horn

each time the button is pressed.

6. The system will pause for 1 second

then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to

indicate that the service mode has been

engaged or honk one time to indicate that

the service mode has been disengaged.

NOTE

When taking your vehicle in for service,

it is recommended that you inform the

service personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with a remote engine start

system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

–CONTINUED –

7-19

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

&Remote transmitter program

(models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”)

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain opened throughout the

entire process).

2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”then

“LOCK”, back to “ON”then “LOCK”, back

to “ON”then “LOCK”, then back to “ON”

again and leave the ignition “ON”through-

out the programming process.

4. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating that

the system has entered the transmitter

learn mode.

5. Press and release the “”button on

the transmitter that you want to program.

6. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that the

system has learned the transmitter. Upon

successful programming, the remote start

confirmation transmitter button will flash

one time.

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept up to

eight transmitters).

8. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK”position, the door is closed or

after 2 minutes.

&System maintenance

NOTE

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected,

it will be necessary to start the vehicle

a minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. This is required to allow

the vehicle electronic systems to re-

synchronize.

!Changing the battery

CAUTION

.Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

.Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the re-

mote engine start transmitter

when replacing the battery.

.Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

.There is a danger of explosion if

an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.

.Batteries should not be exposed

to excessive heat such as sun-

shine, fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing battery of access key fob”F11-45.

7-20

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-

2032) supplied in your remote engine start

transmitter should last approximately one

year, depending on usage. When the

battery begins to weaken, you will notice

a decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side of the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flat-

head screwdriver.

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the

battery and replace with a new one. Be

sure to observe the (+) sign on the old

battery before removing it to ensure that

the new battery is inserted properly

(battery “+”should be pointed away from

the transmitter circuit board on the bat-

tery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw and

test the remote engine start system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

–CONTINUED –

7-21

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

&Certification for remote en-

gine starter

!U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

!Canada-spec. models Manual transmission

This manual transmission is a completely

synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift

lever knob.

To change the shift lever position:

1. Depress the clutch pedal.

2. To shift into all positions other than “R”,

move the shift lever accordingly.

7-22

1) Slider

3. To shift into the “R”position, hold up

the slider, move the lever to the “R”

position, and then release the slider.

4. Gradually release the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

WARNING

.Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or

with the shift lever in the neutral

position. Engine braking has no

effect in either of these condi-

tions and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

.Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,

release the clutch pedal) sud-

denly when starting the vehicle.

By doing so the vehicle might

unexpectedly accelerate or the

transmission could malfunction.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

&Shifting speeds

!Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

!Maximum allowable speeds

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will

enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

With the exception of cases where sudden

acceleration is required, the vehicle

should not be driven with the tachometer’s

needle inside the red area. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

excessive engine wear and poor fuel

economy.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

–CONTINUED –

7-23

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

Gear mph (km/h)

1st 29 (48)

2nd 54 (88)

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

NOTE

Never exceed the posted speed limit.

&Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear

as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride”(over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or

rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon is not an indication of a

problem in your vehicle.

7-24

Continuously variable trans-

mission

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. For some models, it also

has a manual mode or an “L”position.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P”or “N”

position into the “D”or “R”position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

.Shift into the “P”or “R”position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

.Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N”or “P”position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

.Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set

in a forward driving position or

move the vehicle forward by

inertia with the select lever set

in the “R”position. Doing so may

result in an unexpected accident

or malfunction.

.Avoid shifting from one of the

forward driving positions into the

“R”position or vice versa until

the vehicle has completely

stopped. Such shifting may

cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

.When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P”position. Avoid parking

for a long time with the select

lever in any other position as

doing so could result in a dead

battery.

NOTE

.When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

upshift or downshift at higher engine

speeds than when the coolant tempera-

ture is sufficiently high in order to

shorten the warm-up time and improve

driveability. The gearshift timing will

automatically shift to the normal timing

after the engine has warmed up.

.Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalidation

of data which the on-board computer

has collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

.When driving a CVT model under

continuous heavy load conditions such

as when towing a camper or climbing a

long, steep hill, the engine speed or the

vehicle speed may automatically be

reduced. This is not a malfunction. This

phenomenon results from the engine

control function maintaining the cool-

ing performance of the vehicle. The

engine and vehicle speed will return to

a normal speed when the engine is able

to maintain the optimum cooling per-

formance after the heavy load de-

creases. Driving under a heavy load

must be performed with extreme care.

Do not try to pass a vehicle in front

when driving on an uphill slope while

towing.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

–CONTINUED –

7-25

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

.The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that

provides superior transmission effi-

ciency for maximum fuel economy. At

times, depending on varying driving

conditions, a chain operating noise

may be heard that is characteristic of

this type of system.

&Select lever

Type A

1) Select lever button

Type B

1) Select lever button

1) Models with “L”position

2) Models with manual mode

: With the brake pedal depressed,

shift while pressing the select lever

button in.

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in.

: Shift without pressing the select

lever button.

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”,“N”,“D”and it also has an “L”or “M”

gate.

NOTE

For some models, to protect the engine

while the select lever is in the “P”or

“N”position, the engine is controlled

sothattheenginespeedmaynot

become too high even if the accelerator

7-26

pedal is depressed hard.

!P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmis-

sion.

To shift the select lever from the “P”

position to any other position, you should

depress the brake pedal fully then move

the select lever. This prevents the vehicle

from lurching when it is started.

!R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N”to “R”position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R”position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position, movement

of the select lever from the “N”to “R”

position is possible for a limited time

period by depressing the brake pedal,

and then it becomes impossible. For

details, refer to “Shift lock function”F7-30.

!N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N”(neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

NOTE

If the select lever is in the “N”position

when you stop the engine for parking,

you may not subsequently be able to

move it to the “R”and “P”positions. If

this happens, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON”position. You will then be able

to move the select lever to the “P”

position.

!D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require. Also, while driving up and

down a hill, the transmission assists and

controls the driving performance and

engine braking while corresponding to

the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in the

“D”position, depress the accelerator

pedal fully to the floor and hold that

position. The transmission will automati-

cally downshift. In this case, the transmis-

sion will operate like a conventional

automatic transmission. When you re-

lease the pedal, the transmission will

return to the original gear position.

For models with manual mode, if one of

the shift paddles behind the steering

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

–CONTINUED –

7-27

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

wheel is operated while driving in the “D”

position, the transmission will temporarily

switch to the manual mode. In this mode,

you can shift into any gear position using

the shift paddles. For details about the

manual mode, refer to “Selection of

manual mode”F7-28. Once the vehicle

speed stabilizes, the transmission will

switch from the manual mode back to

the “D”position for normal driving.

&Selection of manual mode (if

equipped)

Type A

Type B

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M”position to select the

manual mode.

Select lever/gear position indicator (type

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

7-28

Select lever/gear position indicator (type

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the

currently selected gear in the following

range.

.1st-to-8th-gear range (when the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected (if equipped))

.1st-to-6th-gear range (in other situa-

tions)

The upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gear shift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “”illuminates, upshift-

ing is possible. When the downshift

indicator “”illuminates, downshifting is

possible. When both indicators illuminate,

upshifting and downshifting are both pos-

sible. When the vehicle stops (for exam-

ple, at traffic signals), the downshift

indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+”indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D”position from the “M”

position.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on

the shift paddles. Doing so may

result in accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

.If you attempt to shift down when

the engine speed is too high, i.e., when

a downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

.If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

.You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-

sion.

.The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

.If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT

OIL TEMP”warning light on the combi-

nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

–CONTINUED –

7-29

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

.For models with SI-DRIVE, by select-

ing Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting

will not occur automatically. According

to the road conditions, shift change

manually so that the tachometer needle

does not enter the red zone. Also, if the

engine revolutions reach the specified

number, the fuel supply will be cut. In

this case, perform shift up operation.

&Selection of “L”(if equipped)

Type A

Type B

“L”is for using engine braking when going

down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move

the select lever from the “D”position to the

“L”position.

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

When selected, the indicator “L”will

illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect “L”, move the select lever to

the “D”position.

&Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

.The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

.The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P”position to any other position

before the brake pedal is depressed.

Depress the brake pedal first, and then

operate the select lever.

7-30

.Only the “P”position allows you to turn

the ignition switch from the “ACC”position

to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position and remove

the key from the ignition switch.

.If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position while the select

lever is in the “N”position, the select lever

may not be moved to the “P”position after

a period of time. Therefore, move the

select lever to the “P”position with the

brake pedal depressed soon after the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”position.

!Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position then move the select lever to the

“P”position with the select lever button

pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform

the following steps.

.When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P”to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button”F7-31.

.When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N”to “R”,“P”:

Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-

tion switch in the “ACC”position, move the

select lever to the “P”position with the

select lever button pressed and brake

pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure,

the shift lock system (or the vehicle control

system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, refer to

“Shift lock release using the shift lock

release button”F7-31.

!Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to

remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock

release button is located under the shift

lock cover.

3. While depressing the brake pedal,

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

–CONTINUED –

7-31

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

insert a screwdriver into the hole, press

the shift lock release button using a

screwdriver, and then move the select

lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection

as soon as possible.

&Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

.Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”or

“R”position.

.Make sure to apply the parking brake

when parking your vehicle. Do not hold

the vehicle with only the mechanical

friction of the transmission.

.Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D”position. Use the brake instead.

.The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

malfunction. SI-DRIVE (if equipped)

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)

works to maximize engine performance,

control and efficiency.

This system consists of three modes:

Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp

(S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches,

the character of the power unit changes.

&Intelligent (I) mode

!For smooth, efficient performance

driving

Type A combination meter

7-32

Type B combination meter

The linear acceleration characteristic of

the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal

driving usage.

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

&Sport (S) mode

!For all-around performance driving

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make

the driving experience their own personal

adventure.

&Sport Sharp (S#) mode

!For maximum performance driving

Type A combination meter

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

–CONTINUED –

7-33

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

Type B combination meter

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating

level of engine performance and control.

The throttle becomes more responsive

regardless of the engine speed. Delivering

maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is

ideal for tackling twisting roads and for

merging or overtaking other vehicles on

the freeway with confidence.

When you select the Sport Sharp (S#)

mode while the select lever is in the “D”

position, the transmission gear ratio will

shift from variable speed to eight-speed.

The select lever/gear position indicator

display will change from “D”to the gear

position.

When selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

the following controls will be applied.

Uphill control: Prevents unnecessary

shift-up/shift-down during ascent.

Cornering control: While turning, if there

is a large centrifugal force, shift-up will not

occur: during re-acceleration.

Braking control: At the beginning of

corners etc., heavy application of the

brake pedal will cause automatic down-

shift and gently re-accelerate.

Sudden acceleration return control:

During acceleration, if acceleration pedal

is returned suddenly (for example, at

corners etc.), shift-up will not be applied.

&SI-DRIVE switches

SI-DRIVE switches

To select the Intelligent (I) mode, perform

either of the following procedures.

.Press the “S/I”switch when the Sport

(S) mode is selected

.Press the “S#/I”switch when the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected

To select the Sport (S) mode, press the “S/

I”switch when any mode other than Sport

(S) mode is selected.

To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

press the “S#/I”switch when any mode

other than Sport Sharp (S#) mode is

selected.

7-34

NOTE

.While the engine is cool, you cannot

change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.

.The next time you turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport (S) mode or Sport Sharp

(S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes

to the Intelligent (I) mode.

.While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator light illuminates, the SI-

DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode. In this case, it is not possible to

change to another mode.

.If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to change to

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the

vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

it changes to the Sport (S) mode when

the engine coolant temperature in-

creases.

.If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators

blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Power steering

Power steering warning light (type A)

Power steering warning light (type B)

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”position, the

power steering warning light on the

combination meter illuminates to inform

the driver that the warning system is

functioning properly. Then, if the engine

started, the warning light turns off to inform

the driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

.The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

Starting and operating/Power steering

–CONTINUED –

7-35

Starting and operating/Braking

parking.

.The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period

of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too fre-

quently, this may result in a malfunc-

tion of the power steering control

system.

Braking

&Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

!When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

!Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

!Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe location.

&Brake system

!Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit

brake systems. Each circuit works diag-

onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of

the brake system should fail, the other half

of the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

!Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not

turn off the engine while driving because

that will turn off the brake booster, result-

ing in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to depress the pedal much

harder than normal and the braking dis-

tance will increase.

7-36

!Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

.You might feel that the brake pedal

is applied by lighter force and gener-

ates a greater braking force.

.You might hear an ABS operating

noise from the engine compartment.

&Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when

the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving –overconfidence because

you are driving a vehicle with the

ABS could easily lead to a serious

accident.

CAUTION

.The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)

–CONTINUED –

7-37

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

following distance from other

vehicles.

.When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

.When tire chains are installed,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. Be sure to reduce

your speed and maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front.

.When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

&ABS self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may

feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar

to when the ABS operates, and you may

also hear the sound of the ABS working

from the engine compartment. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of

the ABS being carried out and does not

indicate a malfunction.

&ABS warning light

Refer to “ABS warning light”F3-21.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

system malfunction, the EBD system also

stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

7-38

&Steps to take if EBD system

malfunctions

Brake and ABS warning light (type A)

Brake and ABS warning light (type B)

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the

conventional braking system will still func-

tion. However, the rear wheels will be

more prone to locking when the brakes

are applied harder than usual and the

vehicle’s motion may therefore become

somewhat harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat location.

2. Apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Release the parking brake.

Even if both warning lights turn off:

The EBD system may be malfunctioning.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after restarting

the engine:

1. Turn off the engine again.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Check the brake fluid level. For details

about checking the brake fluid level, refer

to “Checking the fluid level”F11-18.

.If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN”mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

.If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN”mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

.Driving with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working

properly. If the light remains

illuminated, have the brakes in-

spected by a SUBARU dealer

immediately.

.If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system 7-39

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving –overconfidence because

you are driving a vehicle with the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

.Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

.Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

.Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have an inspection of

that system performed by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

.The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

–All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

–Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

–Use only the specified tem-

porary spare tire to replace a

flat tire. With a temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness

of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is reduced and

this should be taken into ac-

count when driving the vehi-

cle in such a condition.

.If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

.The Vehicle Dynamics Control

system helps prevent unstable

vehicle motion such as skidding

using control of the brakes and

engine power. Do not turn off the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem unless it is absolutely ne-

cessary. If you must turn off the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem, drive very carefully accord-

ing to the road surface condition.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

.Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

7-40

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

.Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

NOTE

.The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

–Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

–The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

–An operating sound from the

engine compartment is heard

briefly when starting the engine

and when driving off after starting

the engine.

–The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

.In the circumstances shown in the

following list, the vehicle may be less

stable than it feels to the driver. The

Vehicle Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation does

not indicate a system malfunction.

–on gravel-covered or rutted

roads

–on unfinished roads

–when the vehicle is towing a

trailer

–when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

.Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

.It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if your vehicle is equipped with

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

.Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire. Failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

&Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light”F3-24 and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light”F3-

25.

&Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models with power rear gate)

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

–CONTINUED –

7-41

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models without power rear gate)

Use this switch in the following special

situations. Creating an adequate driving

wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system may help to

recover from the loss of traction. Use the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as

necessary.

.a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy or gravel-covered

surface

.extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light (type A)

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light (type B)

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light “”on the combination

meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will be deactivated and the

vehicle will behave like a model not

equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system. When the switch is pressed

again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light turns off.

With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

deactivated, traction and stability en-

hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is unavailable. Therefore

you should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

.When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system automatically reacti-

vates itself the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position and the engine is restarted.

.If the switch is held down for 30

seconds or longer, the indicator light

turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any further pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

7-42

“LOCK”/“OFF”position and restart the

engine.

.When the switch is pressed to

deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system, the vehicle’s running per-

formance is comparable with that of a

vehicle that does not have a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

.Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is deactivated, compo-

nents of the brake control system may

still activate. When the brake control

system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator

light flashes.

X-mode (if equipped)

WARNING

.Always use the utmost care in

driving –overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with X-mode could easily lead to

a serious accident.

.Always use the utmost care in

driving –overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with hill descent control function

could easily lead to a serious

accident. Be especially careful,

and depress the brake pedal if

necessary when driving on ex-

tremely steep downhill, frozen,

muddy or sandy roads. Failure

to control the vehicle’sspeed

may cause a loss of control and

result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

.Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-mode, winter tires or snow

chains should be used when

driving on snow-covered or icy

roads; in addition, vehicle speed

should be reduced considerably.

Simply having X-mode does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be

able to avoid accidents in any

situation.

.Activating the X-mode should be

done when you encounter a very

slippery surface at low speed.

However, having X-mode is no

guarantee that full vehicle con-

trol will be maintained at all times

and under all conditions. When

activating X-mode, the speed of

the vehicle should be reduced

considerably.

.Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have the system in-

spected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

.The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the X-mode is operating

properly:

–All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

–Keep the tire pressure at the

Starting and operating/X–mode

–CONTINUED –

7-43

Starting and operating/X–mode

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

–Use only the special tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a normal temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness of

the X-mode is reduced and

this should be taken into ac-

count when driving the vehi-

cle in such a condition.

.If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may

be temporarily disabled. In this

case, the hill descent control

indicator light will turn off. When

the hill descent control indicator

light turns off, the hill descent

control function is disabled.

X-mode is the integrated control system of

the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, etc. for driving with bad

road conditions. Using X-mode, you can

drive more comfortably even in slippery

road conditions including uphill and down-

hill.

X-mode has the following functions.

.Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you

can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed

driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is

likely to increase, the brake control system

will be activated to adjust the vehicle

speed.

.Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing

ability and driving ability as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

&To activate/deactivate the

X-mode

X-mode switch

X-mode indicator light (type A)

X-mode indicator light (type B)

To activate:

Press the X-mode switch. While the X-

mode is activated, the X-mode indicator

7-44

light illuminates.

To deactivate:

Press the X-mode switch again. The X-

mode indicator light will turn off when the

X-mode is deactivated.

NOTE

.Even if you try to activate the X-

mode by pressing the X-mode switch

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, the X-mode will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

.If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more while the X-mode is

activated, a buzzer will sound once and

the X-mode will be deactivated.

NOTE

For models with SI-DRIVE:

.The SI-DRIVE mode will change to

the Intelligent (I) mode when the X-

mode is deactivated.

.The SI-DRIVE mode cannot be chan-

ged while the X-mode is activated. At

this time, a buzzer will sound twice.

.While the engine is running, if any of

the following conditions is met, the X-

mode will be deactivated. In this case, it

is not possible to activate the X-mode.

Also, for models with SI-DRIVE, the

mode will change to the Sport (S) mode

and it will not be possible to change to

the other modes.

–The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illu-

minates.

–The AT OIL TEMP warning light

flashes.

–The ABS warning light illumi-

nates.

–The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

.If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to change to

the X-mode. While the vehicle is in the

X-mode, it changes to the Sport (S)

mode when the engine coolant tem-

perature increases.

.It is not possible to activate the X-

mode when the engine is not running,

because the hill descent control func-

tion is not activated.

&Hill descent control function

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when the X-mode is acti-

vated and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill des-

cent control function may not be

sufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when towing

a trailer).

Starting and operating/X–mode

–CONTINUED –

7-45

Starting and operating/X–mode

NOTE

.Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary the

vehicle speed by using the brake pedal

or accelerator pedal.

.During braking by the hill descent

control function, the brake system

warning light will illuminate.

.The hill descent control function

may also operate on a flat road.

.The hill descent control function

may be considered normal when the

following conditions occur.

–An operating sound is heard

briefly from the engine compart-

ment while the hill descent control

function is operating.

–The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder

than usual etc.) when the brake

pedal is depressed during hill des-

cent control function operation.

!Hill descent control indicator light

Hill descent control indicator light (type A)

Hill descent control indicator light (type B)

This light illuminates while the hill descent

control function is in the standby mode. It

flashes while the function is operating. It

will turn off when the function is in the

disabled mode. When this function is

changed from operational to non-opera-

tional, it will turn off when the vehicle

speed reaches more than approximately

18 mph (30 km/h).

7-46

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

Low tire pressure warning light (type A)

Low tire pressure warning light (type B)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise, an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe location.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire placard.

The tire placard is located on

the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on

the tire placard. Refer to “Tires

and wheels”F11-23. The tire

pressure monitoring system

does not function when the ve-

hicle is stationary. After adjusting

the tire pressures, increase the

vehicle speed to at least 25 mph

(40 km/h) to start the TPMS

rechecking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should

turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)

–CONTINUED –

7-47

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction

of the tire pressure sensors. If

the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one

minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

CAUTION

.Do not place metal film or any

metal parts in the cargo area.

This may cause poor reception of

the signals from the tire pressure

sensors, and the tire pressure

monitoring system will not func-

tion properly.

.FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

.U.S.-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Parking your vehicle

&Parking brake

To set the parking brake, depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold it down until

the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.

To release the parking brake, perform the

following procedure.

1. Pull the lever up slightly.

2. Press the release button.

3. Lower the lever while keeping the

button pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake

warning light illuminates. After starting

the vehicle, be sure that the warning light

has turned off before the vehicle is driven.

Refer to “Brake system warning light”F3-

7-48

21.

CAUTION

.Never drive while the parking

brake is set because this will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake linings. Before starting to

drive, always make sure that the

parking brake has been fully

released.

.The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

&Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

.Apply the parking brake firmly.

.For MT models, put the shift lever in the

“1”(1st) for upgrade or “R”(Reverse) for a

downgrade.

.For CVT models, put the select lever in

the “P”(Park) position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of

the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

.Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to people.

.Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

.Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under-

spoiler and rear underspoiler (both

optional), pay attention to blocks

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

–CONTINUED –

7-49

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

and other obstructions on the

ground when parking. The under-

spoilers could be damaged by con-

tact with them.

Hill start assist system

WARNING

.The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal (MT models) and

brake pedal (both MT and CVT

models) are released.

.Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF”position while

the Hill start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will be deactivated and

may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier. 1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill

A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT

models)

B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)

In both these cases, the Hill start assist

system operates under the following con-

7-50

ditions.

.when the clutch pedal is depressed

while the brake pedal is also depressed

(MT models)

.when the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed (CVT models)

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the clutch pedal

(MT models only) and accelerator pedal

(all models).

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

.when starting backward facing uphill

.when starting forward facing downhill

.while the parking brake is applied

.while the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF”position

.while the Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator light is

illuminated

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released. However,

this braking effect should disappear once

the clutch pedal is released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start

assist system may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is

needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

–CONTINUED –

7-51

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

&To activate/deactivate the Hill

start assist system

Hill start assist OFF indicator light (type A)

Hill start assist OFF indicator light (type B)

CAUTION

When starting on an up hill grade,

make sure the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light is off.

If the Hill start assist OFF indicator

light is on, make sure the parking

brake is applied.

To activate or deactivate the Hill start

assist system, perform the following steps.

NOTE

If you make an error when performing

any steps in the following procedure,

place the ignition switch in the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position once and then

start over again.

!To deactivate

1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe

location and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”position.

3. Restart the engine.

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

4. Confirm the following items.

(1) The Brake system warning light

illuminates.

(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

7-52

warning light turns off.

(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off.

(4) The ABS warning light turns off.

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models with power rear gate)

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models without power rear gate)

5. Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF switch for 30 seconds until

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indi-

cator light on the combination meter

turns on and off.

6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch.

7. Within 2 seconds, press back the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.

The Hill start assist OFF indicator light

turns on and off.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”position. Hill start assist is deacti-

vated.

NOTE

When the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continuously.

!To reactivate

To reactivate Hill start assist system,

repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start

assist system is activated, the Hill start

assist OFF indicator light turns off.

&Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator

light

Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill

start assist OFF indicator light”F3-23.

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-53

Starting and operating/Cruise control

Cruise control (if equipped)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions.

These may cause loss of vehicle

control.

.driving up or down a steep grade

.driving on slippery or winding

roads

.driving in heavy traffic

.towing a trailer

NOTE

.On uphill and downhill slopes, de-

pending on the degree of the slope and

the load of the vehicle, there may be

cases when a constant speed cannot

be guaranteed.

.If the cruise control indicator light

does not illuminate even after pressing

the cruise control main button, it is

possible that there is a malfunction in

the system. We recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

.Make sure the cruise control system

is turned off when the cruise control is

not in use to avoid unintentionally

setting the cruise control.

&To set cruise control

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

Cruise control indicator light (type A)

7-54

Cruise control indicator light (type B)

The cruise control indicator light on the

combination meter will illuminate.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the “RES/SET”switch to the

“SET”side and release it. Then release

the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control set indicator light (type A)

Cruise control set indicator light (type B)

At this time, the cruise control set indicator

light is illuminated in the combination

meter.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise

control activated. Simply depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

NOTE

For turbo models, when you set the

desired speed while the Sport Sharp

(S#) mode is selected, the select lever/

gear position indicator will change

from the current gear position indica-

tion to the “D”indication.

Starting and operating/Cruise control

–CONTINUED –

7-55

Starting and operating/Cruise control

&To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

The cruise control can be temporarily

canceled in the following ways.

.Press the “CANCEL”button.

.Press the X-mode switch to activate

the X-mode (models with X-mode).

.Depress the brake pedal.

.Depress the clutch pedal (MT models

only).

WARNING

For CVT models, you can cancel the

cruise control by shifting the select

lever into the “N”position. However,

do not shift the lever into the “N”

position while driving except in case

of emergency. If the select lever is

shifted into the “N”position, the

engine brake will no longer work.

This could result in an accident.

The cruise control set indicator light in the

combination meter turns off when the

cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30

km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES”side to return to the

original cruising speed automatically.

The cruise control set indicator light in the

combination meter will automatically illu-

minate at this time.

&To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

.Press the cruise control main button

again.

.Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”or

“LOCK”/“OFF”position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

&To change the cruising speed

!To increase the speed (by the “RES/

SET”switch)

Press the “RES/SET”switch to the “RES”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

7-56

U.S.-spec. models

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is small,

the set speed can be increased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the

“RES/SET”switch to the “RES”side

quickly.

Except U.S.-spec. models

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is small,

the set speed can be increased 1 km/h

each time by pressing the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES”side quickly.

!To increase the speed (by accel-

erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Press the “RES/SET”switch to the

“SET”side once. Now the desired speed

is set and the vehicle will keep running at

that speed without depressing the accel-

erator pedal.

NOTE

.U.S.-spec. models

If the difference between the actual

vehicle speed when the switch is

pressed and the speed last time you

set is small, the vehicle speed will be

lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This

occurs because the cruise control

system regards this operation as that

intended to decrease the vehicle

speed.

.Except U.S. spec. models

If the difference between the actual

vehicle speed when the switch is

pressed and the speed last time you

set is small, the vehicle speed will be

lowered by 1 km/h. This occurs be-

cause the cruise control system re-

gards this operation as that intended to

decrease the vehicle speed.

.Turbo models

If you depress the accelerator pedal

while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is

selected, the select lever/gear position

indicator may change from the “D”

indication to the current gear position

indication.

Starting and operating/Cruise control

–CONTINUED –

7-57

Starting and operating/Cruise control

!To decrease the speed (by the

“RES/SET”switch)

Press the “RES/SET”switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

U.S.-spec. models

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is small,

the set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6

km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/

SET”switch to the “SET”side quickly.

Except U.S.-spec. models

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is small,

the set speed can be lowered 1 km/h each

time by pressing the “RES/SET”switch to

the “SET”side quickly.

NOTE

If the “RES/SET”switch is repeatedly

operated quickly to the “SET”side, the

set vehicle speed displayed in the

combination meter becomes the low

speed setting. However, when the set

vehicle speed is set to a speed much

lower than the actual vehicle speed, the

set speed may be reset to the actual

vehicle speed.

!To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “SET”side once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

&Cruise control indicator light

Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”

F3-32.

&Cruise control set indicator

light

Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”

F3-32.

7-58

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with

Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to

detect objects or vehicles to the rear,

drawing attention to the driver when

changing a lane or when driving in

reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver by monitoring the rear and

side areas of the vehicle during a

lane change or reversing. However,

you cannot rely on this system

alone in assuring the safety during

a lane change or reversing. Over-

confidence in this system could

result in an accident and lead to

serious injury or death. Since the

system operation has various limita-

tions, the flashing or illumination of

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may be delayed or it may not

operate at all even when a vehicle is

present in a neighboring lane or

approaching from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

&System features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

.To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at

high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind

Spot Detection)

.To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the vehicle

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

above functions.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. When driving in other

countries, certification of the country

where the vehicle is driven must be

obtained. For certification in the U.S.,

refer to “Certification for the BSD/

RCTA”F7-66.

!Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

existing in the blind area. If the system

detects a vehicle existing in the blind area,

it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat-

ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s). If the

driver operates the turn signal lever in the

direction where the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light is illuminating, the system

warns the driver of dangers by flashing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

–CONTINUED –

7-59

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

!Lane Change Assist (LCA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes. If the system detects

a vehicle approaching at a high speed in

the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver

of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light(s) on the outside

mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn

signal lever in the direction where the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is

illuminating, the system warns the driver

of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

!Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

.The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

.A warning buzzer sounds.

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

A) Vehicle that may be detected

WARNING

In angled parking as indicated in the

illustration above, the system may

detect a vehicle (A) that is coming

across the front of your vehicle in

some cases. Always be sure to

check the surroundings with your

eyes when reversing the vehicle,

because the detectability of RCTA

is limited.

7-60

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

2) The out of detection range of the radar

sensors

B) Vehicle that may not be detected

WARNING

The approaching vehicle (B) may

not be detected because the vehicle

reversing is blocked by a parked

vehicle. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle, because the

detectability of RCTA is limited.

&System operation

!Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of

the following conditions are met.

.Theignitionswitchisinthe“ON”

position.

.The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

.The vehicle is driven at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing).

.The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”

position (RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

.The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.

.The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator remains off (except when rever-

sing).

NOTE

.In the following case, the BSD/RCTA

will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA

warning indicator will appear. If the

BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,

have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

–When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light

.In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operating

(or may stop operating) and the BSD/

RCTA warning indicator will appear.

–When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

–When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

–When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in which there are no

objects around (such as in a desert)

for a long time

–When the temperature around

the radar sensors increased exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in summer, etc.

–When the temperature around

the radar sensors becomes extre-

mely low

–When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

–When the vehicle battery be-

comes overvoltage

When the above conditions are cor-

rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

–CONTINUED –

7-61

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

operation and the BSD/RCTA warning

indicator will disappear. However, if the

BSD/RCTA warning indicator has ap-

peared for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

.The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-

tection may be impaired and the sys-

tem may not operate properly under the

following conditions.

–When the rear bumper around

the radar sensors is distorted

–When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors

–When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

–During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

–When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and

through puddles

.The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing.

–Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on the

road or road side, etc.

–Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles

with a low body height such as

sports cars or a trailer with no

cargo)

–Vehicles that are not approach-

ing your vehicle even though they

are in the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or

beside your vehicle when rever-

sing) (The system determines the

presence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the radar

sensors.)

–Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

–Vehicles driving in parallel at

almost the same speed as your

vehicle for a prolonged time

–Oncoming vehicles

–Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

–Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

trying to overtake

.On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighbor-

ing lane.

&BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light/warning buzzer

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-

ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver.

.The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light (when there are vehicles in the

neighboring lanes)

.The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle

is approaching from the left or right side

while reversing)

!BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside

mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle

approaching from behind is detected. If an

indicator light is illuminated and the turn

7-62

signal lever is operated toward the side in

which this light turned on, the indicator

light flashes to warn the driver of dangers.

When reversing the vehicle, the indicator

light flashes when the system detects a

vehicle approaching from either side.

!BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

.When affected by direct sunlight,

you may have difficulty recognizing

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

.When affected by the headlight

beams from the vehicles behind, you

may have difficulty recognizing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

.While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, even if the headlights are

turned on, the brightness of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will not

be reduced. For details about the

illumination brightness control dial,

refer to “Illumination brightness con-

trol”F3-101.

!BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the multi

information display of the combination

meter. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”

F3-44.

!Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

.In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and

the warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings.

–Whenavehiclemovestothe

neighboring lane from a lane next to

the neighboring lane

–When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and downhill

grades

–When going beyond a pass

–When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

are driving on the far side of each lane.

–When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

–In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection)

–When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neighbor-

ing lane

–Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA

OFF switch

–Immediately after the shift lever/

select lever is shifted to the “R”

position

–When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the trunk or cargo area

.During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

–When backing out of an angled

parking space

–When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

–When reversing on sloped roads

–When reversing at a high speed

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

–CONTINUED –

7-63

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

.The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close to

solid objects on the road or road side

(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-

walls).

.The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash when turning at an inter-

section in urban areas or a multilane

intersection.

.The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash and the warning buzzer

may sound if a building or a wall exists in

the reversing direction.

.In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

–When you are driving on the near

side of its lane from the corresponding

vehicle

–When the vehicle driving two lanes

away is driving on the near side of its

lane from your vehicle

&BSD/RCTA warning indicator

!System temporary stop indicator

System temporary stop indicator

This indicator appears when the system is

used under the following conditions.

.Extremely high or low temperatures

.When abnormal voltage exists for the

vehicle battery

.When the radar sensor is significantly

misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected,

the system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will

disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

played for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

!System temporary stop indicator

due to reduced radar sensitivity

System temporary stop indicator due to

reduced radar sensitivity

This indicator appears when the detect-

ability of the radar sensors is reduced.

Once the condition is corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will

disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

played for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

7-64

!System malfunction indicator

System malfunction indicator (type A)

System malfunction indicator (type B)

1) At first, this message will appear

2) Then this message will appear

This indicator appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

&BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type A)

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type B)

If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,

the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on

the multi information display of the combi-

nation meter, and the BSD/RCTA is

deactivated.

Press the switch again to activate the

BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor will disappear.

NOTE

.In the following cases, the system

may not operate properly due to

blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the

system.

–When towing a trailer

–When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

–CONTINUED –

7-65

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

vehicle

–When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

–When running the engine and

makingthewheelsrotatewhile

lifting up the vehicle

.If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position, the last known

status of the system is maintained. For

example, if the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position with the

BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA

will remain deactivated the next time

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON”position.

&Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

!U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

!Canada-spec. models

7-66

&Handling of radar sensors

Radar sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of

the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

NOTE

.To ensure correct operation of the

BSD/RCTA, observe the following pre-

cautions.

–Always keep the bumper surface

near the radar sensors clean.

–Do not affix any stickers or other

items on the bumper surface near

the radar sensors.

–Do not modify the bumper near

the radar sensors.

–Do not paint the bumper near the

radar sensors.

–Do not expose the bumper near

the radar sensors to strong im-

pacts. If a sensor becomes misa-

ligned, a system malfunction may

occur, including the inability to

detect vehicles entering the detec-

tion areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to

contact your SUBARU dealer for

inspection.

–Do not disassemble the radar

sensors.

.If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

Reverse Automatic Braking

System (if equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system

designed to help avoid collisions or reduce

collision damage when reversing the

vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected

in the reversing direction, the system will

notify the driver with a warning sound and

may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto-

matically.

WARNING

.Reverse Automatic Braking is not

a system intended to replace the

driver’s responsibility to check

surrounding areas for vehicles or

obstacles to avoid a collision.

.The driver is responsible for

driving safely. Always be sure to

check the surroundings visually

when reversing the vehicle.

.Since the system operation has

various limitations, the warning

sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present in the reversing direc-

tion.

.The system is not designed to

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

–CONTINUED –

7-67

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

.Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may become

unstable.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys-

tem records and stores the following

data when automatic braking operates.

It does not record conversations, per-

sonal information or other audio data.

.Distance from the object

.Vehicle speed

.Accelerator pedal operation status

.Brake pedal operation status

.Select lever position

.Outside temperature

.The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties con-

tracted by SUBARU may acquire

and use the recorded data for the

purpose of vehicle research and

development. SUBARU and third

parties contracted by SUBARU will

not disclose or provide the acquired

data to any other third party except

under the following conditions.

–The vehicle owner has given his/

her consent.

–The disclosure/provision is

based on a court order or other

legally enforceable request.

–Data that has been modified so

that the user and vehicle cannot be

identified is provided to a research

institution for statistical processing

or similar purposes.

&Reverse Automatic Braking

System overview

The system detects objects using sonar

sensors installed in the rear bumper. If the

system determines a possible collision

with an object in the reversing direction,

automatic deceleration will be activated.

Also, beeping sounds will activate. If the

vehicle is further reversed, automatic hard

braking will be applied and a continuous

beeping sound will activate.

!Detecting range

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reversing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing gate as an

obstacle and the brakes may acti-

vate. In this case, remain calm and

either continue to depress the accel-

erator pedal or cancel the system.

7-68

To cancel the system, refer to “Can-

celing the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing system operation”F7-74.

&Operating conditions

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

will operate when all of the following

conditions are met.

.The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position

.The EyeSight warning indicator is off

.The Reverse Automatic Braking fail

indicator is off

.HALT (Reverse Automatic Braking

system OFF) indicator is off

.The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem is set to on

.The select lever is in the “R”position

.The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9

mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)

NOTE

.When the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing fail indicator is illuminated, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system

cannot be operated. Promptly contact

a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

.When the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing system OFF indicator is illumi-

nated, the Reverse Automatic Braking

system cannot be operated.

.In the following cases, the system

may not be able to properly detect an

obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

–A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the rear bumper near the

sonar sensor

–The rear bumper is modified

–The rear bumper has been re-

moved and reattached

–The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading condi-

tion or modification

–Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the rear bumper near the sonar

sensor

–The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper is

deformed

.On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

.The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed is

less than approximately 3 mph (5

km/h). However, the system does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be able

to avoid collisions in any situation.

.If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver’s

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not oper-

ate.

.The system may not be able to

detect the following objects

–Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor

–Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select lever is

set to the “R”position

–Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor such as a

chain link fence.

.Objects the system is not designed

to detect

–Pedestrians

–Moving objects including moving

vehicles

–Objects which absorb sound

waves such as cloth or snow

–Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle

–Objects that are low to the

ground such as parking blocks

–Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above

.The system may not be able to

properly detect objects or may cause

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

–CONTINUED –

7-69

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

a system malfunction when the follow-

ing conditions exist

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby

–Horn sound from another vehicle

–Engine sound from other vehi-

cles

–Sound of an air brake

–Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle

–A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted nearby

–A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction

Weather conditions

–Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area near

the sonar sensor becomes too hot

or too cold to operate

–The rear bumper near the sonar

sensors is exposed to heavy rain or

a significant amount of water

–Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

–Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor

–Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna) or

commercial attachment parts (trai-

ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) are attached

–Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached

Vehicle conditions

–The vehicle is significantly in-

clined

–The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s

loading condition, etc.

–When the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

accident

Surrounding environment

–A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing direc-

tion

–When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area

–When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to the

vehicle such as narrow tunnels,

narrow bridges, narrow roads or

narrow garages

–Wheel tracks or a hole is present

in the ground of the reversing

direction

–When reversing over a drainage

cover (grate cover)

–The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill

–A curb is present in the reversing

direction

–When reversing downhill

7-70

&Reverse Automatic Braking

System operation

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

System is in operation, the range between

the vehicle and the detected object will be

indicated on the multi function display.

Also, warning sounds will activate in 3

levels to warn the driver of a potential

collision.

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob-

ject detected) 35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

alert (approaching the

object)

28 to 35 inches (70 to 90

cm) Yellow + Green Short beeps

Close proximity alert

(approaching closer

to the object)

20 to 28 inches (50 to 70

cm)

Orange + Yellow +

Green Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the

object)

20 inches (50 cm) or less Red + Orange +

Yellow + Green Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

–CONTINUED –

7-71

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

!Obstacle detected and alert level

Long proximity alert (object detected)

1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

Medium and close proximity alert (ap-

proaching the object and approaching

closer to the object)

1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)

2) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be shown on the multi function display.

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automatic

braking will be applied.

7-72

!Object close behind warning

Automatic braking warning

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,

the system may determine the risk of

collision with the object. In this case, short

warning beeps or continuous warning

beeps will sound and either strong auto-

matic braking or torque control will be

applied to prevent collision.

!When the vehicle is being stopped

by the system

Depress brake pedal warning

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the multi function display and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

!After the vehicle is stopped by the

system

1) Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator will illuminate and the system will

temporarily stop operating. The Reverse

Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

will turn off when the select lever is shifted

to a position other than the “R”position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to “R”

position.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

–CONTINUED –

7-73

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

NOTE

Automatic braking only holds the ve-

hicle for 2 seconds. Before the auto-

matic brake is released, a warning

sound (3 short beeps followed by a

long beep) will activate to alert the

driver that the automatic brake will be

released.

&Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking system opera-

tion

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

can be temporarily cancelled by any of the

following operations.

.While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the brake

pedal is depressed.

.While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

.The accelerator pedal is depressed

hard (In this case, limited acceleration will

be canceled and the vehicle will continue

reversing.).

.The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R”position.

NOTE

The system will be cancelled if the

object is no longer detected.

&Reverse Automatic Braking

system ON/OFF setting

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking system can be

set by operating the multi function display.

For details about how to operate the multi

function display, refer to “Basic operation”

F3-45.

1) ON/OFF setting of Reverse Automatic

Braking

2) ON/OFF setting of the object detection

warning sound

CAUTION

When towing a trailer, turn the

Reverse Automatic Braking OFF

switch to deactivate the system.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for

additional information about towing

a trailer.

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

system is turned OFF, the following

indicator will illuminate.

RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the

Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned

OFF.

RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the

Reverse Automatic Braking system is

turned ON.

NOTE

.When the settings cannot be chan-

ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be

grayed out.

.The ON/OFF setting key may be

7-74

greyed out if the Reverse Automatic

Braking system malfunctions. In this

case, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF”position and then turn it

to the “ON”position again. If the

setting cannot be changed even after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON”

position again, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

.The settings will be restored as

follows when the select lever is shifted

to the “R”position next time.

–Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem settings: default (ON setting)

–Object detection warning beep-

ing sound: the setting selected by

operating the combination meter

display (type B combination meter)

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the combination meter

display (type B combination meter).

.Warning volume

.Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF

For details, refer to “Menu screens”F3-

42.

&RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-

nates in the combination meter. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

&Handling of the sonar sen-

sors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the

rear bumper. To ensure the proper opera-

tion of the Reverse Automatic Braking

system, observe the following precau-

tions.

.Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the sonar

sensors.

.Always keep the rear bumper surface

near the sonar sensors clean.

.Do not modify the rear bumper.

.Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

.Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

–CONTINUED –

7-75

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunction may occur, including inability

to detect objects in the reversing direction.

If any strong impact is applied to the rear

bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

.Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, paintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

7-76

New vehicle break-in driving –the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2

Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4

Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5

On-road and off-road driving.............................. 8-6

Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8

Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10

Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11

Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11

Tire chains......................................................... 8-11

Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-12

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12

Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-14

Roof rack (if equipped) ...................................... 8-14

Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-15

Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17

If not towing a trailer.......................................... 8-18

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-19

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-19

Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-19

Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23

Driving tips

Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving –the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

New vehicle break-in driving

–the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

.Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

.Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

.Avoid starting suddenly and rapid

acceleration, except in an emergency.

.Avoid hard braking, except in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads or

brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

fuel.

.Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

.Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

.Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

.Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

.Keep the engine properly tuned.

.Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

.Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

.Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

.Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

.Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

.Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

.Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

.Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

.Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

.If at any time you suspect that

8-2

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

.Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

Non-turbo models

Turbo models

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-

ter:

.Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the

catalytic converter.

.Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

.Avoid racing the engine.

.Never turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF”position while the vehicle is moving.

.Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

.Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

.Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

WARNING

.Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.,

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

Driving tips/Catalytic converter

–CONTINUED –

8-3

Driving tips/Periodic inspections

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

.Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

.Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements”F7-3.

.Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

8-4

Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

.Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

.Always use the utmost care in

driving –overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

.When replacing or installing tire

(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

bottom of driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

in items (a) to (h), it may lead to

serious mechanical damage to

the drive train of your car and

affect the following factors.

—Ride

—Handling

—Braking

—Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

—Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD models

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during acceleration

and added engine braking force during

deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind.

.An AWD model is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models

–CONTINUED –

8-5

Driving tips/On–road and off–road driving

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling,

however, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an

ample distance from other vehicles.

.Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire placard, which is located under the

door latch on the driver’s side.

.Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of the follow-

ing items than that specified in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

–Engine oil

–Brake fluid

–Rear differential gear oil

–Manual transmission oil (MT mod-

els)

–Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

–Front differential gear oil (CVT

models)

.There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detailed information, refer to “Towing”

F9-13.

On-road and off-road driving

WARNING

.In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. You the driver and

all your passengers should fas-

ten the seatbelts before starting

to drive in order to minimize the

chance of serious injury or death.

.Do not make sharp turns and

quick maneuvers unless abso-

lutely unavoidable. Such actions

are dangerous as you may lose

control, possibly resulting in a

rollover which could cause death

or serious injury.

.Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

.Whenever strong crosswinds are

present, slow down sufficiently

to maintain control of your vehi-

cle. Remember that your vehicle,

with its higher profile and center

of gravity, is more likely to be

affected by crosswinds than or-

dinary passenger cars.

.Always use the utmost care in

driving –overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive model could easily

lead to a serious accident.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher

ground clearance which enables them to

be used for wide applications including off-

road driving. But please keep in mind that

your vehicle is neither a conventional off-

road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A

higher center of gravity in relation to the

tread width as compared with ordinary

passenger cars makes vehicles of this

type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility

vehicles have a significantly higher roll-

over rate than other types of vehicles. The

high ground clearance of this vehicle is a

real advantage, giving you a better view of

the road and allowing you to anticipate

problems earlier. However, remember that

your utility vehicle is not designed for high-

speed cornering comparable to ordinary

passenger cars and that your vehicle

could roll over if you make a sharp turn

at high speed.

If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain

8-6

common sense precautions such as those

in the following list should be taken.

.Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

.Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

.Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

.Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

.Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

.Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

.Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

with your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

.If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and cross the stream without stopping.

The water should be shallow enough that

it does not reach the vehicle’s under-

carriage. Water entering the engine air

intake or the exhaust pipe or water

splashing onto electrical parts may da-

mage your vehicle and may cause it to

stall. Never attempt to drive through

rushing water; regardless of its depth, it

can wash away the ground from under

your tires, resulting in possible loss of

traction and even vehicle rollover.

.Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

.Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after engine

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

.After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

.Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle and

cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on

the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity and make it more prone

to tip over.

.If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the shift lever/

select lever back and forth between “1”/

“D”and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

.When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st. For CVT models with

manual mode, refer to “Selection of

manual mode”F7-28.

.Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

.Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

Driving tips/On–road and off–road driving

–CONTINUED –

8-7

Driving tips/Winter driving

need to be washed thoroughly.

.Frequent driving of an AWD model

under hard-driving conditions such as

rough roads or off roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of the follow-

ing items than that specified in the

maintenance schedule described in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

–Engine oil

–Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to your

SUBARU while operating it off-road and

not using common sense precautions

such as those listed above is not eligible

for warranty coverage.

Winter driving

&Operation during cold

weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand,

flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold

temperatures reduce battery capacity.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen,

use hot water to melt the ice, and after-

wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

.Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

8-8

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

.State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

!Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

!Parking in cold weather

Do not use the parking brake when

parking for long periods in cold weather

since it could freeze in that position.

Instead, you should observe the following

tips.

1. Place the shift lever in “1”or “R”for MT

models, or the select lever in “P”for CVT

models.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or

when it snows, raise the wiper blades off

the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked

after use on roads heavily covered with

snow, or has been left parked during a

snowstorm, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or ice

buildup on the suspension, disc brakes

and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the disc

brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-

ness.

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

!Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

!Opening rear gate (models with

power rear gate)

CAUTION

Before operating the power rear

gate, check that there is no frost or

snow between the power rear gate

and the vehicle body. If you notice

Driving tips/Winter driving

–CONTINUED –

8-9

Driving tips/Winter driving

frost or snow etc. on the power rear

gate, remove it. If you forcibly

operate the power rear gate with

frost or snow, it may cause a mal-

function.

&Driving on snowy and icy

roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information on braking on slippery sur-

faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)”F7-37 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control system”F7-40.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of

vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’sintakesystemandmay

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

!Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the

windshield or rear window, perform the

following procedure.

.To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow

selection in “”and the temperature set

for maximum warmth until they are com-

pletely thawed. Refer to “Climate control”

F4-1.

.If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer”F3-116.

.To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,

use the rear window defogger. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer”F3-116.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “”and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer”F3-106.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

Refer to “Hazard warning flasher”F3-8.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and freez-

ing temperatures. Blades of this type give

superior wiping performance in snowy

conditions. Be sure to use blades that

are suitable for your vehicle.

8-10

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

&Corrosion protection

Refer to “Corrosion protection”F10-4.

&Snow tires

WARNING

.When replacing or installing tire

(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

bottom of driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

in items (a) to (h), it may lead to

serious mechanical damage to

the drive train of your car and

affect the following factors.

—Ride

—Handling

—Braking

—Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

—Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

.Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires”as original equipment, which are

designed to provide an adequate measure

of traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving. In winter, it

may be possible to enhance performance

through use of tires designed specifically

for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

&Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of

clearance between the tires and

vehicle body.

Driving tips/Winter driving

–CONTINUED –

8-11

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use

of another type of traction device (such

as spring chains) may be acceptable if

use on your vehicle is recommended

by the device manufacturer, taking into

account tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with

a traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

&Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the shift

lever/select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D”and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than in 1st (MT models and CVT

models with manual mode).

If your vehicle is a CVT model with manual

mode, for information about holding the

transmission in the 2nd position, refer to

“Selection of manual mode”F7-28.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

.Never allow passengers to ride

on a folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury.

.Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

8-12

WARNING

.When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

.Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

.Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

.Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

.Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover (if

equipped). Such items could

tumble forward in the event of a

sudden stop or a collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not carry spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items inside the vehicle.

.Do not close the rear gate with

cargo protruding from the cargo

area. The cargo may be da-

maged. In models with power

rear gate, the rear gate may open

via reverse function.

.In models with power rear gate,

be careful not to allow collision

between the rear gate and the

cargo when you are loading

cargo on the roof. Otherwise,

the rear gate will hit the cargo

when opening and may cause

damage to both the cargo and

the rear gate.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

&Vehicle capacity weight

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

–CONTINUED –

8-13

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

&GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation. The GVWR

equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle –including standard equipment,

fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

assembly) plus the vehicle capacity

weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale, found at a commercial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

&Roof rack (if equipped)

1) Roof rack

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the crossbars to the roof rails and

installing an appropriate carrying acces-

sory according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. The roof rack system is

designed to carry loads (cargo and ac-

cessories) of no more than 150 lbs (68

kg). Be sure not to exceed your vehicle’s

GVWR and GAWR.

8-14

CAUTION

.When using the roof rack, make

sure that the total carrying load

of the roof rack and luggage does

not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle.

.For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rails must be used together

with the roof rack and any appro-

priate carrying attachment that

may be needed. The roof rails

must never be used alone to

carry cargo. Otherwise, damage

to the roof or paint, or a danger-

ous road hazard due to loss of

cargo could result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

&Roof molding and crossbar

(if equipped)

CAUTION

.For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof molding must be used to-

gether with a roof crossbar kit

and the appropriate carrying at-

tachment. Otherwise, damage to

the roof or paint or a dangerous

road hazard due to loss of cargo

could result.

.When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing the

roof crossbar kit to the roof moldings and

installing the appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing the roof crossbar

kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying

attachment, never exceed the maximum

load limit as explained below. You should

also be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). For information

about loading cargo into or onto your

vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle”

F8-12. The maximum load limit of the

cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment

must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place

the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest

the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.

Always properly secure all cargo.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

–CONTINUED –

8-15

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

!Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of the crossbars is

designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-

ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

!Removal and installation of the

crossbars

Each of the two roof moldings has two

mounting points for crossbars. Each

mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use

a screwdriver to remove the covers. When

installing the crossbars on the roof mold-

ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

WARNING

.Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. For possible recommenda-

tions and limitations, refer to

“Trailer towing”F8-19.

.Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000

lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer

has safety chains and that each

chain will hold the trailer’s max-

imum gross weight. Towing trai-

lers without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if

the trailer separates from the

hitch due to coupling damage or

hitch ball damage.

.Be sure to check the hitch pin

and safety pin for positive lock-

ing placement before towing a

trailer. If the ball mount comes off

the hitch receiver, the trailer

could get loose and create a

8-16

traffic safety hazard.

.Although towing regulations for

trailer or caravan vehicles vary

by state/region, all regulations

agree that specifications such

as the maximum gross trailer

weight must not exceed the les-

ser of the following:

–Maximum gross trailer weight

–Maximum gross tongue

weight

–GVWR

–GAWR

.Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will

also negate your insurance cov-

erage and/or may violate the

state road and traffic acts and

regulations.

.Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight

distributing hitch.

.The standard bumper beam must

be installed after you remove the

trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

dealer for purchase of a standard

bumper beam if you do not have

the original.

.Safety performance is decreased

and there is increased risk of

injury to passengers in the case

of an accident if the trailer hitch

or a standard bumper beam is

not installed. One of them must

always be installed on the vehi-

cle.

.If a trailer hitch is installed, it is

not possible to install the rear

towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

1,500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs

(90 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing”F8-19.

&Connecting a trailer

1) Ball mount

2) Hitch pin

3) Safety pin

A) Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

–CONTINUED –

8-17

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole

located on the hitch receiver tube so that

the pin passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin through the

provided hole on the hitch pin securely.

4. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not come

off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight turn situations into

account; however, be careful not to let

them drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the

safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch electrical wire har-

ness’s black four-pin electrical wire con-

nector to the towing trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

electrical wire harness by individually

activating the brake, stop and turn signal

lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer electrical

wire harness before launching or re-

trieving a watercraft.

&If not towing a trailer

.Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube.

.Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch electrical wire

harness to protect against possible da-

mage.

.Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-18

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing equipment appropriate for your

vehicle. Do not use towing equipment

other than genuine SUBARU towing

equipment. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions on correct installation and

use provided by SUBARU.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

&Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused

by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to

tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

will be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions”in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

&Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

.Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

.Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are accepta-

ble.

!Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum weight in the following table.

Conditions Maximum total trailer

weight

When towing a trailer

with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)

Driving tips/Trailer towing

–CONTINUED –

8-19

Driving tips/Trailer towing

!Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the

combined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Certification label

GVWR is shown on the certification label

located at the bottom of the driver’s side

door pillar of your vehicle.

!Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR are also

shown on the certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

8-20

while driving.

!Tongue load

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the maximum value

of 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load,

be sure to position the towing coupler at

the height at which it would be during

actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly

as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

Driving tips/Trailer towing

–CONTINUED –

8-21

Driving tips/Trailer towing

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

&Trailer hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

.Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

.Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

&Connecting a trailer

!Trailer brakes

WARNING

.Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

.Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are

recommended, and must be installed

properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

!Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

8-22

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trailer

tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping

onto the ground in case the trailer tongue

should disconnect from the hitch ball.

Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking

tight turn situations into account; however,

be careful not to let them drag on the

ground.

!Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

!Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to

increase its capacity and accommodate

wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals and the brake

lights each time you connect a trailer to

your vehicle.

!Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem-

porary spare tire is used. The tem-

porary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”F12-

10.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications. Also check federal, state,

province and/or other applicable regula-

tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representative or profes-

sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare

tire is firmly secured.

&Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

.For models equipped with the

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

driving support systems, when

towing a trailer, press the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch to deactivate

the system. The system may not

operate properly due to the

blocked radar waves. For details

about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,

Driving tips/Trailer towing

–CONTINUED –

8-23

Driving tips/Trailer towing

refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”

F7-65.

.For models equipped with RAB

(Reverse Automatic Braking)

system, turn the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking OFF switch to

deactivate the system. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for addi-

tional information about towing a

trailer.

.Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly

country on hot days.

.When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent when compared to normal

operation. You should never

drive at excessive speeds but

always employ extra caution

when towing a trailer. You should

also keep the following tips in

mind.

.The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

!Before starting out on a trip

.Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

.Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle

is tipped sharply up at the front and down

at the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

.Check that the tire rating and pressures

are correct.

.Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that:

–the trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

–the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’sbrake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-

ated.

–the safety chains are connected

properly.

–all cargo in the trailer is secured

safety in position.

–the side mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a sig-

nificant blind spot.

.Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel”of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

!Driving with a trailer

.You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

.Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-

erations. If your vehicle has a manual

transmission, always start out in first gear

and release the clutch at moderate engine

revolution.

.Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

.Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In

a tight turn, the trailer could hit your

vehicle.

.Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and promptly begin

8-24

decelerating your vehicle at a gradual

pace.

.When passing other vehicles, consid-

erable distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

.Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can

be difficult and requires experience. Never

accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the

bottom of the steering wheel with one

hand.

To reverse around a corner, perform the

following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the

opposite direction to the way you want to

turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing

around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

tion.

4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line

with the trailer, then straighten the steering

again.

.If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

!Driving on grades

.Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

.When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

.When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the following indicators be-

cause the engine and transmission are

relatively prone to overheating.

: Coolant temperature high warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(CVT models)

If the coolant temperature high warning

Driving tips/Trailer towing

–CONTINUED –

8-25

Driving tips/Trailer towing

light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light

illuminates, immediately turn off the air

conditioner and stop the vehicle in the

nearest safe location. For further instruc-

tions and additional information, refer to

the following sections.

–“If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency”F9-2

–“Engine overheating”F9-12

–“Coolant temperature low indicator

light/Coolant temperature high warn-

ing light”F3-17

–“AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT

models)”F3-19

.For CVT models, avoid using the

accelerator pedal to stay stationary on

an uphill slope instead of using the

parking brake or foot brake. That may

cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

!Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT

models) or “P”position (CVT models)

and shut off the engine.

8-26

If you park your vehicle in case of an

emergency ........................................................ 9-2

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2

Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3

Screwdriver and wheel nut wrench ...................... 9-4

Under the rear floor............................................. 9-4

Flat tires............................................................... 9-5

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-5

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-8

Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9

How to jump start............................................... 9-10

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-12

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-12

Towing ................................................................ 9-13

Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-13

Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17

Access key fob –if access key fob does not

operate properly ............................................. 9-17

Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-18

Switching power status...................................... 9-18

Starting engine .................................................. 9-18

Rear gate –if the rear gate cannot be

opened............................................................. 9-19

Power rear gate - if power rear gate does

not operate properly....................................... 9-20

When the power rear gate is deactivated ............ 9-20

When the rear gate cannot be unlocked ............. 9-21

When the rear gate cannot be closed ................. 9-21

If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-22

In case of emergency

In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency

1) Models with multi function display

2) Models without multi function display

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

.Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

9-2

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. For the correct tire

pressure, refer to “Temporary spare tires”

F12-10.

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

.Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

.Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

.Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

.Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

.When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

.The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

.Jack

.Jack handle

.Screwdriver

.Towing hook (eye bolt)

.Wheel nut wrench

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

–CONTINUED –

9-3

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

&Screwdriver and wheel nut

wrench

1) Screwdriver

2) Wheel nut wrench

The screwdriver, wheel nut wrench, etc.

are stored in your vehicle.

The tools can also be stored in the tool

bucket.

&Under the rear floor

The jack, jack handle and towing hook are

stored as shown in the following illustra-

tions.

1) Under-floor storage compartment (if

equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage

compartment”F6-17.)

2) Jack handle

3) Spare tire

4) Tool bucket

1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver

3) Jack

4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

NOTE

.For how to use the jack, refer to

“Flat tires”F9-5.

.The following items may be different

depending on the model.

–The shape of the storage com-

partment

–The locations of some mainte-

nance tools

9-4

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

&Changing a flat tire

WARNING

.Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in a

severe accident.

.Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

.Before using the jack, be sure

that there are no occupants or

cargo in the vehicle.

.Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out

of the jacking point due to a jolt

and this can result in a severe

accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake securely and

shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)

or the select lever to the “P”(Park)

position (CVT models).

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to

“Maintenance tools”F9-3.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubri-

cated before using it.

6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the

attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take

the spare tire out.

NOTE

If the spare tire provided in your vehicle

is a temporary spare tire, carefully read

“Temporary spare tire”F9-2 and

strictly follow the instructions.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

–CONTINUED –

9-5

In case of emergency/Flat tires

1) Notch

2) Valve hole

7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert

a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on

the opposite side of the valve hole and pry

the wheel cover to remove it.

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points

9. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

9-6

12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer

to “Tires”F12-10. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Be sure to place the spacer

in the manner shown in the illustration,

and then tighten the bolt in the front side of

the bracket.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

–CONTINUED –

9-7

In case of emergency/Flat tires

17. When storing the spare tire after

repairing a flat tire, be sure to place the

spacer in the manner shown in the

illustration, and then tighten the bolt in

the rear side of the bracket.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

&Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

Low tire pressure warning light (type A)

Low tire pressure warning light (type B)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when a tire

pressure is severely low relative to the

selected TPMS mode.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, never

brake suddenly and keep driving

straight ahead while gradually redu-

cing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place. Otherwise an

accident involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the vehicle

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side. If this light still illumi-

nates while driving after adjusting

the tire pressure, a tire may have

9-8

significant damage and a fast leak

that causes the tire to lose air

rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace

it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not oper-

ate properly. If a liquid sealant is

used, contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer or other qualified service

shop as soon as possible. Make

sure to replace the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter when

replacing the tire. You may reuse the

wheel if there is no damage to it and

if the sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected. Jump starting

WARNING

.Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,

thoroughly flush the exposed

area with water immediately. Get

medical help if the fluid has

entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

.The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

.Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

.Whenever working on or around

a battery, always wear suitable

In case of emergency/Jump starting

–CONTINUED –

9-9

In case of emergency/Jump starting

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

.Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

.A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

.Jump starting is dangerous if it

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

&How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

9-10

A) Booster battery

B) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged

battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) term-

inal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the other

cable to the negative (−) terminal of

the booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle

with the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11

In case of emergency/Engine overheating

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap while the engine is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe

location.

&If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

.Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

.Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

&If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment. Refer to “Engine

hood”F11-7.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact an authorized

SUBARU dealer for repair.

3. After the coolant temperature high

warning light that has blinked or illumi-

nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.

For details about the warning light, refer to

“Coolant temperature low indicator light/

Coolant temperature high warning light”

F3-17.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank. If the coolant level is below the

“LOW”mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”

mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine coolant”F11-13.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

9-12

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD models (both CVT

and MT models) with the front

wheels raised off the ground while

the rear wheels are on the ground,

or with the rear wheels raised off the

ground while the front wheels are on

the ground. This will cause the

vehicle to spin away due to the

operation or deterioration of the

center differential.

&Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hook

and tie-down hook. Never use sus-

pension parts or other parts of the

body for towing or tie-down pur-

poses.

Front towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and

jack handle out of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head

screwdriver into the cutout of the cover

and pry open the cover.

In case of emergency/Towing

–CONTINUED –

9-13

In case of emergency/Towing

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

.Do not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

.Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply an excessive load to the

towing hook.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and

jack handle out of the cargo area.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a

threaded hole for attaching the towing

hook.

9-14

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

.Do not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

.Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the fuel pump

shut off function when the vehi-

cle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply an excessive load to the

towing hook.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

In case of emergency/Towing

–CONTINUED –

9-15

In case of emergency/Towing

Rear tie-down holes:

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove

the plugs. After using the rear tie-down

holes, return the plugs to their original

places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

&Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position for CVT models. Shift the shift

lever into the “1st”position for MT models.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under-

spoiler and rear underspoiler (both

optional), be careful not to scrape

them when placing the vehicle on

the carrier and when removing the

vehicle from the carrier.

9-16

&Towing with all wheels on the

ground

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in the “N”/neutral position.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON”position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

.Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF”position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

.Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not

running. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

.If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

.For CVT models, the traveling

speed must be limited to less

than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the

traveling distance to less than 31

miles (50 km). For greater speeds

and distances, transport your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

Access key fob –if access

key fob does not operate

properly

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key fob and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key fob and the push-

button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or the access key fob

battery being low.

.Locking/unlocking doors including the

rear gate

.Switching power status

.Starting the engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged, replace it with a

new one. Refer to “Replacing battery of

access key fob”F11-45.

In case of emergency/Access key fob –if access key fob does not operate properly

–CONTINUED –

9-17

In case of emergency/Access key fob –if access key fob does not operate properly

&Locking and unlocking

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

While pressing the release button of the

access key, take out the mechanical key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

mechanical key according to the proce-

dure described in “Locking and unlocking

from the outside”F2-6.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

reinsert the mechanical key into the

access key fob.

&Switching power status

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the status of the push-button

ignition switch changes to either of the

following.

.When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

.Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated, press

the push-button ignition switch with the

brake pedal released. The status of the

push-button ignition switch then changes

to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

&Starting engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

9-18

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC”or “ON”position.

5. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC”or “ON”position, while

depressing the brake pedal, press the

push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Rear gate –if the rear gate

cannot be opened

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by operating the rear gate opener

button, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl

tape or a cloth.

2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind

the rear gate trim panel.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate open

lever with fingers because doing so

may cause an injury. Always use a

flat-head screwdriver or a similar

tool.

Models without power rear gate

Models with power rear gate

3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to

In case of emergency/Rear gate –if the rear gate cannot be opened

–CONTINUED –

9-19

In case of emergency/Power rear gate –if power rear gate does not operate properly

the right position using a flat-head screw-

driver or a similar tool. Power rear gate - if power

rear gate does not operate

properly

&When the power rear gate is

deactivated

NOTE

.After deactivating automatic open-

ing and closing, the rear gate may open

or close automatically, moving little by

little. This movement is to prevent the

rear gate from quickly opening and

closing and it will continue for approxi-

mately 15 seconds but it is not a

malfunction.

.While the power rear gate is tem-

porarily deactivated, if it is struck by

body parts or objects and sustains a

strong impact, the temporary deactiva-

tion may be canceled. The purpose of

this is to absorb the impact of the

collision and it is not a malfunction. In

this case, the rear gate will not open or

close automatically.

If the power rear gate senses a malfunc-

tion, an electronic chirp will sound and

automatic opening and closing will be

deactivated. The rear gate will automati-

cally open or close depending on the

degree it is open to at this time.

In order for the rear gate to open and close

automatically, carry out the following

operation. If the rear gate does not open

and close automatically after carrying out

this operation, we recommend that you

have the vehicle checked at a SUBARU

dealer.

!When the rear gate is closed

1. Press and hold the rear gate opener

button. If the rear gate does not open,

perform the procedure described in “Rear

gate –if the rear gate cannot be opened”

F9-19.

2. Gently close the rear gate by hand

until it reaches the half-shut position.

3. Press and hold either of the power rear

gate buttons.

9-20

!When the rear gate is stuck at the

fully open position or does not fully

1. Gently close the rear gate by hand

until it reaches the half-shut position. If the

rear gate does not close, perform the

procedure described in “Rear gate –if the

rear gate cannot be opened”F9-19.

2. Press and hold either of the power rear

gate buttons.

&When the rear gate cannot be

unlocked

Perform the procedure described in “Rear

gate –if the rear gate cannot be opened”

F9-19.

&When the rear gate cannot be

closed

CAUTION

.On areas which are not flat, such

as hills, do not conduct any of

the following actions. The rear

gate may close suddenly and hit

someone’s head, face or catch

fingers and body parts in it,

resulting in injury.

.Even while conducting the fol-

lowing actions on a flat surface,

be careful not to be injured by

getting caught in or hit by the

rear gate.

.After closing the rear gate by the

following methods, we recom-

mend that you have the vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer.

If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a

flat battery, etc., while the rear gate is

stopped midway, it can be closed by the

following methods.

1. Release the fitting on the left side rear

seat release latch.

2. After pushing the rear seat release

latch down once, remove the latch.

1) Unlock

2) Lock

3. Using a flat-head screw driver, push

the lever inwards for temporary deactiva-

In case of emergency/Power rear gate –if power rear gate does not operate properly

–CONTINUED –

9-21

In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident

tion of the rear gate. If your vehicle is involved in

an accident

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. We recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. To minimize the risk of fire due to

fuel leakage when your vehicle is subject

to impact from an accident or another

factor, the system stops supplying fuel.

However, depending on the impact condi-

tions at the time of collision, the fuel pump

shut-off system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to re-

start the engine after the system is

activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC”position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC”or “OFF”position.

2. Restart the engine.

9-22

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3

Cleaning alloy wheels......................................... 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4

To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5

Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-6

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-6

Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6

Appearance care

Appearance care/Exterior care

Exterior care

&Washing

CAUTION

.When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes,

drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the

brakes.

.Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of electrical equipment.

.When washing the inner fenders,

underbody, bumpers and pro-

truding objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to avoid contact with any

sharp ends in order to prevent

injures.

.Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

.Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be washed

off by using a light detergent, as required.

If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly rinsed

off the surface and not allowed to dry

there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with

plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand

brush when washing down underbody,

inner fenders and suspension to remove

mud and dirt effectively.

!Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-

pension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or

sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off

10-2

the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-

sion and axle parts, as they are particu-

larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do

not use a sharp-edged tool to remove

caked mud.

CAUTION

.Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

.Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage to some electrical

parts.

!Using a warm water washer

.Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

.Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

.If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as moldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

&Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-grained compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A

No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained

compound. Coarse-grained compounds

have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore

the original luster. Frequent polishing with

acompoundoranincorrectpolishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

&Cleaning alloy wheels

.Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of

any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on

too long, it may be difficult to clean off.

.Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

Appearance care/Exterior care

–CONTINUED –

10-3

Appearance care/Corrosion protection

.Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possible

when it has been splashed with sea water,

exposed to sea breezes, or driven on

roads treated with salt or other agents.

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

&Most common causes of

corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust

control chemicals, or used in coastal

areas where there is more salt in the air,

or in areas where there is considerable

industrial pollution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corro-

sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot

dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-

tion.

&To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

.roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

.mud, sand, or gravel

.coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

10-4

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, and hood latch should

be inspected and lubricated periodically.

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

&Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use

the cleaner on a hidden place and make

sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.

Use the cleaner according to its instruc-

tions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

&Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and head restraints be

covered, or the windows shaded, to

prevent fading or shrinkage. Seat covers

and head restraint covers should be

removed before operating the vehicle.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of

genuine leather.

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

–CONTINUED –

10-5

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

&Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used by

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or fuel must never be used

on leather or synthetic interior ma-

terials. Doing so could damage the

surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

&Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,

console panel, and switches

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

.Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or fuel, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

.Do not use chemical solvents

that contain silicone on the vehi-

cle audio system, electrical com-

ponents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

&Monitor (if equipped)

To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-

tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone

cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is

extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth

moistened with neutral detergent then

carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

.Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the monitor. Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

.Do not wipe the monitor with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

.Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, fuel, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches at the

bottom of the monitor.

10-6

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-4

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5

Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-5

Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 11-5

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-7

Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-8

Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-8

Turbo models..................................................... 11-9

Engine oil.......................................................... 11-10

Engine oil consumption.................................... 11-10

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-10

Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-11

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-11

Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-12

Cooling system ................................................ 11-12

Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-12

Engine coolant ................................................. 11-13

Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-14

Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-14

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-16

Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-16

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-16

Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-17

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-17

Continuously variable transmission fluid....... 11-17

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and

rear differential gear oil................................ 11-17

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-17

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-18

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-18

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-18

Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-19

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-19

Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-19

Brake booster .................................................. 11-20

Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-20

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-20

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-20

Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-21

Checking the clutch function............................ 11-21

Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-21

Hill start assist system.................................... 11-21

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-22

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-22

Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-23

Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-23

Types of tires................................................... 11-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped) ...................................................... 11-23

Tire inspection................................................. 11-25

Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-25

Wheel balance ................................................. 11-27

Wear indicators ............................................... 11-27

Rotational direction of tires .............................. 11-28

Tire rotation..................................................... 11-28

Maintenance and service

Tire replacement .............................................. 11-29

Wheel replacement........................................... 11-30

Alloy wheels ..................................................... 11-30

Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-30

Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-32

Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-33

Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-33

Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-34

Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-35

Battery............................................................... 11-36

Fuses ................................................................ 11-37

Installation of accessories............................... 11-38

Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-39

Headlights (models with LED headlights).......... 11-39

Headlights (models with halogen

headlights) .................................................... 11-39

Front turn signal light, front side marker light

and parking light ........................................... 11-41

Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-42

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-42

License plate light ........................................... 11-44

Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-44

Replacing key battery...................................... 11-44

Replacing battery of access key fob ................. 11-45

Replacing transmitter battery ........................... 11-46

Maintenance schedule

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required to

be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

NOTE

For models with a multi function dis-

play, you can set a reminder to be

displayed when a scheduled mainte-

nance item is almost due. For details,

refer to “Maintenance settings”F3-76.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

.Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

.Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

.Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

.Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

.Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

.Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

.Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

.Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

.Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

.Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule

–CONTINUED –

11-3

Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions

erative. NEVER use a circuit

tester for this wiring. If your

SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-

sioner needs service, consult

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

&Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

.Always stop the engine and set

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

.Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after

the engine has stopped.

.Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

.Always remove the key from the

ignition switch. When the ignition

switch is in the “ON”position,

thecoolingfanmayoperate

suddenly even when the engine

is stopped. If your body or

clothes come into contact with a

rotating fan, that could result in

serious injury.

.Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system (a

dealer option), temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent it from

unexpectedly starting the engine.

CAUTION

.Do not contact the drive belt

cover while checking the compo-

nents in the engine compart-

ment. Doing so may cause your

hand to slip off the cover and

result in an unexpected injury.

.Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a

burn or other injury. Note that the

oil filter becomes very hot when

the engine is running and re-

mains hot for some time after

the engine has stopped.

11-4

&When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

while the engine is running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Maintenance tips

Some clips and fender linings must be

removed before replacing the air cleaner

elements or specific bulbs.

&Removing and reinstalling

clips

!Removing clips

There are several types of clips used for

your vehicle.

!Type A clips

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the clips with a flat-head

screwdriver using leverage.

3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

!Type B clips

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in

the illustration.

2. Pull the protruded center portion to

remove the entire body of the clip.

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

–CONTINUED –

11-5

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

!Type C clips

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center portion

of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

!Reinstalling clips

Type A clips

Type B clips

Type C clips

Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of

the clip into the hole.

11-6

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front

grille and the hood toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed

position and then let it drop.

2. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push

the hood forcibly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Maintenance and service/Engine hood 11-7

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

Engine compartment overview

&Non-turbo models

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(MT) (page 11-18)

2) Fuse box (page 11-37)

3) Battery (page 11-36)

4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-30)

5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)

6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13)

7) Radiator cap (page 11-13)

8) Engine oil filter (page 11-11)

9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-10)

10) Air cleaner case (page 11-14)

11-8

&Turbo models 1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-18)

2) Fuse box (page 11-37)

3) Battery (page 11-36)

4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-30)

5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)

6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13)

7) Radiator cap (page 11-13)

8) Engine oil filter (page 11-11)

9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-10)

10) Air cleaner case (page 11-14)

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview 11-9

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

Engine oil

CAUTION

.If the level gauge cannot be

pulled out easily, twist the level

gauge right and left, then gently

pull it out. Otherwise, you may be

injured accidentally straining

yourself.

.Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

.Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

&Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance

intervals:

.When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

.When the engine oil is of lower quality

.When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

.When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

.When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods of

time)

.When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of time)

.When towing a trailer

.When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

.When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

.When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

.When the vehicle accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil

more frequently. Different drivers in the

same car may experience different results.

If your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU retailer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

&Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine. If you check the oil level

just after stopping the engine, wait a few

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan before checking the level.

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

3) Oil filter

CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pulled

out easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Otherwise,

you may be injured by accidentally

straining yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

11-10

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of

the level gauge. The engine oil level must

be judged by the lowest of the two levels.

If the oil level is below the low level mark,

add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

.Be careful not to touch the en-

gine oil filter when removing the

oil filler cap. Doing so may result

in a burn, a pinched finger, or

may cause some other injury.

.Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

.Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do

not add any additional oil above the

upper level when the engine is cold.

&Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in

extremely cold weather.

NOTE

.Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Fully trained mechanics are on standby

at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the

special tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also,

used oils are properly disposed of.

.If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

&Recommended grade and

viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil”F12-4.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

–CONTINUED –

11-11

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

&Synthetic oil

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using

synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

oil”F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

Warranty and Maintenance booklet.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

CAUTION

.Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU Super Coolant that

does not require the first change

for 11 years/137,500 miles (11

years/220,000 km). This coolant

should not be mixed with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. Should it be

necessary to top up the coolant

for any reason, use only

SUBARU Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant is

diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

.Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

&Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the coolant temperature high

warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,

the cooling fan circuit may be defective.

Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-

tor light/Coolant temperature high warning

light”F3-17.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses”F11-37 and “Fuses and

circuits”F12-12.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling

system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

11-12

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

&Engine coolant

!Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

1) “FULL”level mark

2) “LOW”level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW”level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL”level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

coolant up to just below the filler neck as

shown in the following illustration.

1) Fill up to this level

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

–CONTINUED –

11-13

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

CAUTION

.Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

.Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

!Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters

intake air but also stops flames if

the engine backfires. If the air

cleaner element is not installed

when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-

rated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

&Replacing the air cleaner

element

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-

der extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

!Non-turbo models

1) Clip

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (front).

11-14

2. Open the air cleaner case (rear).

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the

air cleaner case (front).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

!Turbo models

1) Clip

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

2. Open the air cleaner case and remove

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

–CONTINUED –

11-15

Maintenance and service/Spark plugs

the air cleaner element.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

4. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the

air cleaner case (front).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced in

the correct order.

&Recommended spark plugs

For the recommended spark plugs, refer

to “Electrical system”F12-10.

Drive belts

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement of

the belt should be done according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-16

Manual transmission oil

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion oil level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

oil inspection should be performed ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

&Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual transmission, front differential

and rear differential gear oil”F12-7.

Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion fluid level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

fluid inspection should be performed

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Front differential gear oil

(CVT models) and rear differ-

ential gear oil

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

&Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual transmission, front differential

and rear differential gear oil”F12-7.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

Maintenance and service/Manual transmission oil 11-17

Maintenance and service/Brake fluid

Brake fluid

&Checking the fluid level

WARNING

.Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

.Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

.If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

.When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

.Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

.Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

1) “MAX”level line

2) The brake fluid level must be checked in

this area.

3) “MIN”level line

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the brake system

at the front part of the reservoir (shaded

area in the illustration).

If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the

recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use

only brake fluid from a sealed container.

&Recommended brake fluid

Refer to “Fluids”F12-9.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

11-18

Clutch fluid (MT models)

&Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, when performing this

work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

.Clutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

.If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

.When clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

.Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

.Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

.The fluid level for the clutch

system must be checked at the

inboard side of the reservoir. It

cannot be checked at the out-

board side of the reservoir.

1) “MAX”level line

2) The clutch fluid level must be checked in

this area.

3) “MIN”level line

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the clutch system

at the inboard side of the reservoir

(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid

level is below “MIN”,addtherecom-

mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed

container.

&Recommended clutch fluid

Refer to “Fluids”F12-9.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of clutch

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models) 11-19

Maintenance and service/Brake booster

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move

slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake

booster operates properly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

&Checking the brake pedal

free play

1) 0.02 - 0.11 in (0.5 - 2.7 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check

the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf

(10 N, 1 kgf).

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

&Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

11-20

Clutch pedal (MT models)

Check the clutch pedal free play according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

&Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the engine and

transmission smoothly couple without

any sign of slippage.

&Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.16 - 0.43 in (4.0 - 11.0 mm)

Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Hill start assist system

Ensure that the Hill start assist system

operates properly under the following

circumstances.

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by

depressing the brake pedal (all models)

and clutch pedal (MT models only), with

the engine running.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not

move backward for several seconds after

the brake pedal is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts

climbing the grade by following the normal

starting procedures.

If the Hill start assist system does not

operate as described above, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service/Clutch pedal (MT models) 11-21

Maintenance and service/Replacement of brake pad and lining

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

The disc brakes have audible wear

indicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

&Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows.

!Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times.

!Parking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a

force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,

15.3 kgf]).

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately

220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7–8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be

certain to pull the lever up slowly

and gently.

11-22

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

When the parking brake is properly

adjusted, braking power is fully applied

by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches

gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200

N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever

stroke is not within the specified range,

have the brake system checked and

adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

&Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

!All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON”and/or “M+S”(Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

!Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

!Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

&Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may

not react immediately to a sudden drop in

tire pressure (for example, a blow-out

caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and then drive the vehicle in cold

outsideair,theresultingdropintire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on the

tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke

–CONTINUED –

11-23

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: P205/55R16 89V and

P205/50R17 88V

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F(−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C) 38

(260, 2.6)

(255, 2.55)

−108F(−238C) 40

(275, 2.75) 39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not turn off,

the tire pressure monitoring system may

not be functioning normally. In this event,

go to a SUBARU dealer to have the

system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tires) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

on the combination meter will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious perso-

nal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

If this light still illuminates while

11-24

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

&Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately if you find any problem.

NOTE

.When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on

other rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and

approach the curbs as squarely as

possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

.If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the

tires and/or wheels may be damaged.

Drive slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

&Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Tire placard

The tire placard is located on the door

pillar on the driver’s side. Check the tire

pressures when the tires are cold. Use a

pressure gauge to adjust the tire pres-

sures to the values shown on the tire

placard.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the

vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

–CONTINUED –

11-25

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

pressure.

NOTE

.The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

.The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

3 hours or has been driven less than

one mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

.Correctly inflated tire (tread worn

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

.Under inflated tire (tread worn on the

shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

11-26

.Over inflated tire (tread worn in the

center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface

bumps and dips, possibly resulting in

vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for

the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the

tire pressures to the values that match the

loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly heat up. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread se-

paration, and destruction of the

tires. The resulting loss of vehicle

control could lead to an accident.

&Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU

dealer if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is designed to

hold each wheel at a certain alignment

(relative to the other wheels and to the

road) for optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

&Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible when

the depth of the tread grooves decreases

to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be

replaced when the tread wear indicator

appears as a solid band across the tread.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

–CONTINUED –

11-27

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible.

&Rotational direction of tires

Example of rotational direction marked on

the sidewall

1) Front

If the tires have specific rotational direc-

tion, refer to the arrow marked on the side

wall. The arrow should be pointing forward

direction when the wheel are fitted.

&Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

11-28

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.

Move the tires to the positions shown in

the illustration each time they are rotated.

For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tires at the time of rotation. After tire

rotation, adjust the tires pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

&Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fitted as standard equipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and construction matching those

shown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at

the same time.

WARNING

.When replacing or installing tire

(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

bottom of driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

in items (a) to (h), it may lead to

serious mechanical damage to

the drive train of your car and

affect the following factors.

—Ride

—Handling

—Braking

—Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

—Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

.Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

–CONTINUED –

11-29

Maintenance and service/Alloy wheels

&Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to

change a flat tire, always check the

tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-

ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).

If any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

Alloy wheels

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-

maged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

.When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat tire, always check the tightness of

the wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

.Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

.Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

.When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for alloy wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type A)

11-30

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type B)

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will illuminate.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as

follows.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add windshield washer fluid until it

reaches the “FULL”mark on the tank. If

windshield washer fluid is unavailable use

clean water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

.Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid

–CONTINUED –

11-31

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

.State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the

outer surface of the windshield (or rear

window) and the wiper blades using a

sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

CAUTION

.Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

.While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

.When returning the raised wiper

arms to the original positions,

carefully return the wiper arms

on the windshield by hand. You

should not return the wiper arms

to the windshield only by the

return spring. Otherwise, the wi-

per arms may be deformed and/

or the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

11-32

&Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Open the cover

2) Pull down the wiper blade

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

opening the cover and pulling it down in

the direction shown in the illustration.

3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

&Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber

1) Support

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the

support.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

3. Align the claws of the support with the

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

–CONTINUED –

11-33

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

grooves in the rubber and slide the blade

rubber assembly into the support until it

locks.

1) Claw

2) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the support between the stoppers

on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is

not retained properly, the wiper blade may

scratch the windshield.

&Rear window wiper blade

assembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

11-34

&Rear window wiper blade

rubber

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

–CONTINUED –

11-35

Maintenance and service/Battery

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Battery

WARNING

.Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

.For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when work-

ing near any battery. Never lean

over a battery.

.Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

.To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

.Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

.Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

.Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer.

Wash hands after handling

11-36

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1) Spare fuses

The other one (main fuse box) is housed

in the engine compartment. Also, the

spare fuses are stored in the fuse box

cover.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

Maintenance and service/Fuses

–CONTINUED –

11-37

Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories

box in the engine compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF”position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”

F12-12.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

11-38

Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

chart”F12-16.

Do not touch the glass portion of the

light bulb with bare hands. When

holding the glass portion is una-

voidable, hold it using a clean dry

cloth to avoid getting moisture and

oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is

scratched or dropped, it may blow

out or crack.

NOTE

.For models with type A combination

meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the

SRH OFF indicator on the combination

meter blinks when the ignition switch is

in the “ON”position. It indicates that

SRH has been deactivated. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

.For models with type B combination

meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, a

message appears on the warning

screen when the ignition switch is in

the “ON”position. It indicates that SRH

has been deactivated. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

&Headlights (models with LED

headlights)

The LED headlights may be malfunction-

ing if the headlights do not illuminate or if

they do not illuminate at the appropriate

brightness. In this case, have your vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

&Headlights (models with ha-

logen headlights)

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, fingerprints or

grease on the bulb surface will

develop into hot spots, causing the

bulb to break. If there are finger

prints or grease on the bulb surface,

wipe them away with a soft cloth

moistened with alcohol.

NOTE

.If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

.It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

To replace the right side headlight bulb,

use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the

air intake duct, then remove the air intake

duct.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

–CONTINUED –

11-39

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

!High beam headlight

1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with new one. At this

time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

4. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

5. Reconnect the electrical connector.

!Low beam headlight

1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with a new one. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

4. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

5. Reconnect the electrical connector.

11-40

&Front turn signal light, front

side marker light and parking

light

NOTE

.It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

.The bulbs used for the parking light

emit light that is whiter than conven-

tional bulbs. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for replacement.

.Models with LED headlight: It may

be difficult to replace the bulbs used

for the parking light. Have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

Front side marker light and parking light

(models with halogen headlight)

Front side marker light (models with LED

headlight)

Front turn signal light (models with halo-

gen headlight)

Front turn signal light (models with LED

headlight)

1. Remove the electrical connector from

the clip.

Front turn signal light (models with halo-

gen headlight)

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

–CONTINUED –

11-41

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

Front turn signal light (models with LED

headlight)

Front side marker light and parking light

(models with halogen headlight)

1) Front side marker light

2) Parking light

Front side marker light (models with LED

headlight)

1) Front side marker light

2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and

pull it out.

3. Pull out the bulb from the socket and

replace the bulb with a new one.

4. To install the socket to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

5. Install the electrical connector to the

clip.

&Front fog light (if equipped)

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

&Rear combination lights

NOTE

The stop light is an LED (Light Emitting

Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for replacement.

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws that secure

the rear combination light assembly.

11-42

2. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly rearward and remove it from the

vehicle.

1) Tail light (This light is also used as the

rear side marker light.)

2) Rear turn signal light

3) Backup light

3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

5. Set the bulb socket into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

1) Guide pins

2) Clip

6. Put the rear combination light assem-

bly into place while aligning the 2 guide

pins and a catch with the guide holes and

a clip on the vehicle.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

–CONTINUED –

11-43

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery

7. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

&License plate light

1. License plate light must be pushed

inwards, then pulled out to be removed.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the

license plate light cover.

&Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Replacing key battery

The access key fob / transmitter battery

may be discharged under the following

conditions.

.The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable

.The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable

.The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard dis-

tance

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

.Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/trans-

mitter when replacing battery.

.Be careful not to touch or da-

mage the printed circuit board in

the access key fob/transmitter

when replacing the battery.

.Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

.There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

11-44

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

.Batteries should not be exposed

to excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

.Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

.Dispose of used batteries according

to local laws.

.Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

.It is recommended that the battery

be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.

.Use a new battery.

.After replacing the battery, confirm

that the access key fob/transmitter

functions properly.

&Replacing battery of access

key fob

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

access key fob cover, make sure

that the plastic part does not come

off or become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

1. Take out the mechanical key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to

remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery

–CONTINUED –

11-45

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

&Replacing transmitter battery

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-

ing sure to install the new battery with the

11-46

negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “”or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery 11-47

————————————————————————————————————————

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2

Engine ............................................................... 12-3

Fuel ................................................................... 12-3

Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4

Manual transmission, front differential and rear

differential gear oil ........................................... 12-7

Fluids ................................................................ 12-9

Engine coolant ................................................... 12-9

Electrical system.............................................. 12-10

Tires ................................................................ 12-10

Temporary spare tires ...................................... 12-10

Brake disc ....................................................... 12-11

Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-12

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ................................................. 12-12

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ................................................. 12-14

Bulb chart......................................................... 12-16

Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-19

Specifications

Specifications/Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

&Dimensions

in (mm)

Item Non-turbo models Turbo models

Overall length 181.5 (4,610) 180.9 (4,595)

Overall width 70.7 (1,795)

Overall height 68.3 (1,735)*

67.7 (1,720)*

Wheel base 103.9 (2,640)

Tread Front 60.8 (1,545)

Rear 61.2 (1,555)

Ground clearance*

8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

*2: Models with roof rails

*3: Models without roof rails

12-2

&Engine

Engine model FB25

(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

FA20

(2.0 L, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke petrol engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498) 122 (1,998)

Bore 6Stroke in (mm) 3.70 63.54 (94.0 690.0) 3.39 63.39 (86.0 686.0)

Compression ratio 10.3 : 1 10.6 : 1

Firing order 1–3–2–4

&Fuel

Model Fuel Fuel tank capacity

Non-turbo models Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Turbo models Unleaded gasoline with 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher

For more details, refer to “Fuel”F7-3.

Specifications/Specifications

–CONTINUED –

12-3

Specifications/Specifications

&Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil”F11-10.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended

that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

!Approved engine oil

We recommend that you always use SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

12-4

!Alternative engine oil

If SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the

temperature and other factors.

!Non-turbo models

Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SN with the

words

“RESOURCE CONSERVING”

ILSAC GF-5, which can be

identified with the ILSAC certifi-

cation mark (Starburst mark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and

protection. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may

be used if replenishment is needed but

should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic

oil at the next oil change.

–Adding the oil from low level to

full level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

–Changing the oil and oil filter:

5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)

Specifications/Specifications

–CONTINUED –

12-5

Specifications/Specifications

!Turbo models

Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature Oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SN with the

words

“RESOURCE CONSERVING”

ILSAC GF-5, which can be

identified with the ILSAC certifi-

cation mark (Starburst mark)

5W-30 synthetic oil is required for

optimum engine performance and pro-

tection. Conventional oil may be used if

synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may

be used if replenishment is needed but

should be changed to 5W-30 synthetic

oil at the next oil change.

–Adding the oil from L to F level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

–Changing the oil and oil filter:

5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)

12-6

&Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (CVT models)

Oil grade .SUBARU Extra MT*

.API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*

.SUBARU Extra MT*

.API classification GL-5 (75W-90)

Oil capacity*

3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) Non-turbo models 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)

Turbo models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Manual transmission oil”F11-17 “Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil”F11-17

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: Equivalent to factory-filled oil.

*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.

Specifications/Specifications

–CONTINUED –

12-7

Specifications/Specifications

Oil Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

.75W-90*

.90

*: Recommended

Oil capacity*

0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil”F11-17

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

12-8

&Fluids

Fluid Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models) Consult your SUBARU dealer.

Non-turbo models: 12.6 US qt

(11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)

Turbo models: 13.1 US qt (12.4

liters, 10.9 Imp qt)

“Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid”F11-17

Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid –“Brake fluid”F11-18

Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid –“Clutch fluid (MT models)”F11-

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

&Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

Non-turbo models MT models 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

SUBARU Super CoolantCVT models 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)

Turbo models CVT models 9.5 US qt (9.0 liters, 7.9 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system”F11-12.

Specifications/Specifications

–CONTINUED –

12-9

Specifications/Specifications

&Electrical system

Battery type Mexico-spec. models 55D23L

Other models 75D23L

Alternator Non-turbo models 12V-150A

Turbo models 12V-130A

Spark plugs Non-turbo models SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)

Turbo models ILKAR8H6 (NGK)

&Tires

Vehicle model Non-turbo models Turbo models

Tire size P225/60R17 98H P225/55R18 97H P225/55R18 97H

Wheel size 17 67J 18 67J 18 67J

Pressure Front 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel

nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening

procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire”F9-5.

&Temporary spare tires

Temporary spare tire size T145/80D17 185/65R17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure) 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

12-10

&Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Specifications/Specifications 12-11

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

Fuses and circuits

&Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating Circuit

1 20A .Trailer hitch connector

2 15A .Rear seat heater

3 15A .Door locking

4 10A .Front wiper deicer relay

5 10A .Combination meter

6 7.5A .Remote control rear

view mirrors

.Seat heater relay

7 15A .Combination meter

.Integrated unit

8 10A .Stop light

9 15A .Front wiper deicer

10 7.5A .D-OP +B

11 7.5A .Turn signal unit

12 15A .Transmission control

unit

.Engine control unit

.Integrated unit

13 20A .Accessory power outlet

(center console)

14 15A .Parking light

.Tail light

.Rear combination light

12-12

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating Circuit

15 10A .Luggage light

.Keyless unit

16 7.5A .Illumination

17 15A .Seat heaters

18 10A .Backup light

19 7.5A .Wiper relay

20 10A .Accessory power outlet

(instrument panel)

21 10A .Starter relay

22 7.5A .Air conditioner

.Rear window defogger

relay coil

23 Empty

24 10A .Audio unit

.Navigation system (if

equipped)

25 15A .SRS airbag system

26 Empty

27 15A .Blower fan

28 15A .Blower fan

29 15A .Fog light

30 Empty

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating Circuit

31 7.5A .Auto air conditioner unit

.Integrated unit

32 7.5A .Clutch switch

.Steering lock control

unit

33 7.5A .Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol unit

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

–CONTINUED –

12-13

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

&Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating Circuit

1 30A .ABS unit

.Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol unit

2 25A .Main fan (cooling fan)

3 25A .Sub fan (cooling fan)

4Empty

525A .Audio

630A .Headlight (low beam)

715A .Headlight (high beam)

8 20A .Back-up

9 15A .Horn

10 25A .Rear window defogger

.Mirror heater

11 20A .Fuel pump

12 20A .Continuously variable

transmission control unit

13 7.5A .Engine control unit

14 15A .Turn and hazard warn-

ing flasher

15 15A .Tail and illumination re-

lay

16 7.5A .Alternator

12-14

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating Circuit

17 Empty

18 Empty

19 15A .Headlight (low beam –

right hand)

20 15A .Headlight (low beam –

left hand)

Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-15

Specifications/Bulb chart

Bulb chart

NOTE

Lights A, B, C, D, E and F are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

12-16

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight/Daytime running light

(models with halogen light) 12V-60W HB3

2) Vanity mirror light 12V-2W –

3) Front turn signal light 12V-28W/8W

7444NA

4) Low beam headlight (models with halogen light) 12V-55W H11

5) Front fog light

Models without steering responsive fog lights system 12V-19W H16

Models with steering responsive fog lights system 12V-55W H11

6) Map light 12V-8W –

7) Parking light (models with halogen light)

12V-5W W5W

8) Dome light 12V-8W –

9) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W

10) Door step light 12V-5W W5W

11) Cargo area light 12V-5W W5W

12) Tail light (This light is also used as the rear side marker light) 12V-5W W5W

13) Backup light 12V-16W W16W

14) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W

15) License plate light 12V-5W W5W

Specifications/Bulb chart

–CONTINUED –

12-17

Specifications/Bulb chart

Wattage Bulb No.

A) Low/High beam headlight (models with LED light) ––

B) Parking light (models with LED light) ––

C) Daytime running light (models with LED light) ––

D) Side turn signal light (if equipped) ––

E) High-mounted stop light ––

F) Stop light ––

*1: Only 28W illuminates

*2: The bulbs used for the parking light emit light that is whiter than conventional bulbs. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

12-18

Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)

2) Emission control label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Certification label

5) Vehicle identification number plate

6) Model number label

7) Fuel label

8) Air conditioner label

Specifications/Vehicle identification 12-19

————————————————————————————————————————

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2

Tire information .................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4

Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5

Tire care –maintenance and safety

practices........................................................ 13-10

Vehicle load limit –how to determine................ 13-10

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities .............................................. 13-13

Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-14

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-14

Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-15

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-15

Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-15

Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-16

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

&Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These markings

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

!Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

!P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

!Load and Speed Rating De-

scriptions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

13-2

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “90”means 1,323 lbs

(600 kg), “89”means 1,278 lbs (580

kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V”means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

.Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

.The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

!Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review

of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01”to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

!Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

!Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

–CONTINUED –

13-3

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

!Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg

(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

!Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

!Construction

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-

WALL 2 POLYESTER”

!Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards”F13-15.

&Recommended tire inflation

pressure

!Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure

For recommended cold tire inflation

pressure for your vehicle’s tires,

refer to “Tires”F12-10.

!Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

!Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

13-4

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

!Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure out-

doors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

&Glossary of tire terminology

.Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

.Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

.Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

.Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

.Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

.Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

.Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

.Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

.Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

.Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

.Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

–CONTINUED –

13-5

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

.Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

.Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

.Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

.Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

.Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has

a particular side that must al-

ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.

.Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

.Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

.Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

.Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

.Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

.Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

.Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

.Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

.Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

.Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

.Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

.Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

13-6

.Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

.Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

.Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

.Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

.Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special

trim.

.Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

.Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

.Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

.Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

.Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

.Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

.Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

.Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

.Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or

protective bands.

.Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

.Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber com-

pound from the cord material in

the sidewall.

.Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

.Tread

That portion of a tire that comes

into contact with the road.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

–CONTINUED –

13-7

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

.Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

.Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

.Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

.Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

.Vehicle maximum load on the

tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

.Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is ap-

pended to the end of this section)

and dividing by 2.

.Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

13-8

Table 1 —Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

–CONTINUED –

13-9

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

&Tire care –maintenance and

safety practices

.Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

.Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’streadwear

indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehiclecontrolcanleadtoan

accident.

.To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

For information about the tire rota-

tion order, refer to “Tire rotation”

F11-28. Replace any damaged or

unevenly worn tires at the time of

rotation. After tire rotation, adjust

the tire pressures and make sure

the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-

tened. For information about the

tightening torque and tightening

sequence for the wheel nuts, refer

to “Flat tires”F9-5.

&Vehicle load limit –how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver’s side door pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your

vehicle’s placard.

Thevehicleplacardalsoshows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit −(total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue

load of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-

ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”

F8-12.

For information about towing capa-

city and weight limits, refer to

“Trailer towing”F8-19.

13-10

!Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 900 lbs or

408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

–CONTINUED –

13-11

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 408 kg or

900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

13-12

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

&Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’smaximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door

pillar.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

–CONTINUED –

13-13

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

&Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and

on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, and

vehicle and tire performance in the

following ways. This could lead to

an accident and possibly result in

severe personal injury.

.Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

.Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

.Stopping distance will increase.

.Brakes could overheat and fail.

.Suspension, bearings, axles and

other body parts could break or

experience accelerated wear that

will shorten vehicle life.

.Tires could fail.

.Tread separation could occur.

.Tire could separate from its rim.

&Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.”on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX”amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150

lb passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 −750 (5 6150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

13-14

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

&Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

&Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

&Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards

–CONTINUED –

13-15

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or ex-

cessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possi-

ble tire failure.

Reporting safety defects

(U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehi-

cles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Subaru of

America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,

you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Building, Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

13-16

Index

14-2 Index

Abbreviation ................................................................... 3

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-37

Warning light ......................................................... 3-21

Access key fob .......................................................... 2-10

Warning light ......................................................... 3-26

Accessories.............................................................. 11-38

Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-14

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-7

Manual climate control.............................................. 4-8

Air filtration system..................................................... 4-13

Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-8

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-25

All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-23

Alloy wheel .............................................................. 11-30

Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3

Antenna...................................................................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-37

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-26

Armrest..................................................................... 1-12

Ashtray..................................................................... 6-11

AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-19

Audio

aha

by HARMAN................................................ 5-44

AM/FM radio ......................................................... 5-28

Antenna.................................................................. 5-2

AUX..................................................................... 5-61

Base display audio set.............................................. 5-4

Basic operation...................................................... 5-18

Bluetooth audio ...................................................... 5-58

CD ....................................................................... 5-53

iPod...................................................................... 5-56

Pandora

.............................................................. 5-50

SiriusXM Satellite Radio .......................................... 5-37

STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set................ 5-6

Steering switches for audio...................................... 5-63

SUBARU STARLINK............................................... 5-26

Unit setting ............................................................ 5-19

USB memory ......................................................... 5-55

Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-108, 3-109

Automatic climate control.............................................. 4-7

Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................... 3-102

Warning light.......................................................... 3-32

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ................................................ 1-18

Battery .................................................................... 11-36

Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-8

Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9

Replacement (access key fob) ............................... 11-45

Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-20

Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-46

Bluetooth

Audio .................................................................... 5-58

Hands-free phone system........................................ 5-71

Bluetooth

settings ..................................................... 5-66

Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device .................. 5-66

Setting Bluetooth details.......................................... 5-69

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-37

Bottle holder................................................................ 6-9

Brake

Assist ................................................................... 7-37

Booster........................................................ 7-36, 11-20

Disc .................................................................... 12-11

Fluid............................................................ 11-18, 12-9

Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-22

Parking........................................................ 7-48, 11-23

Pedal .................................................................. 11-20

System ................................................................. 7-36

Brake pedal

Free play ............................................................. 11-20

Reserve distance .................................................. 11-20

Brake system ............................................................ 7-36

Warning light ......................................................... 3-21

Braking..................................................................... 7-36

Tips...................................................................... 7-36

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-22

BSD/RCTA................................................................ 7-59

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................... 7-62

OFF indicator ................................................ 3-34, 7-65

OFF switch ........................................................... 7-65

Warning indicator ........................................... 3-33, 7-64

Warning volume............................................. 3-44, 7-63

Bulb

Chart.................................................................. 12-16

Replacing............................................................. 11-39

Cargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-14

Light ...................................................................... 6-2

Tie-down hooks...................................................... 6-16

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center console............................................................ 6-6

Changing

Coolant ............................................................... 11-14

Flat tire .................................................................. 9-5

Oil and oil filter..................................................... 11-11

Charge warning light ................................................... 3-18

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light ....................................................................... 3-16

Checking

Brake pedal free play............................................ 11-20

Brake pedal reserve distance................................. 11-20

Clutch function ..................................................... 11-21

Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-21

Coolant level........................................................ 11-13

Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-18

Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-19

Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-30

Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-10

Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-30

Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-37

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................ 1-33

Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-38

Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-41

Child safety ................................................................... 5

Locks.................................................................... 2-32

Chime

Key........................................................................ 3-5

Light ..................................................................... 3-93

Index 14-3

14-4 Index

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-14

Cigarette lighter ......................................................... 6-11

Cleaning

Alloy wheels.......................................................... 10-3

Interior.................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille ..................................................... 4-12

Climate control system ................................................. 4-3

Automatic................................................................ 4-7

Manual ................................................................... 4-8

Clock........................................................ 3-39, 3-59, 3-73

Clutch

Fluid............................................................ 11-19, 12-9

Pedal .................................................................. 11-21

Compass ....................................................... 3-108, 3-109

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-25

Fluid............................................................ 11-17, 12-9

Coolant............................................................ 11-13, 12-9

Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-17

Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-17

Cooling system......................................................... 11-12

Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-54

Indicator light......................................................... 3-32

Set indicator light ................................................... 3-32

Cup holder .................................................................. 6-7

Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-7

Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-8

Daytime running light system....................................... 3-98

Defogger.................................................................. 3-116

Defrosting.................................................................. 4-11

Deicer ..................................................................... 3-116

Differential gear oil

Front........................................................... 11-17, 12-7

Rear ........................................................... 11-17, 12-7

Dimensions................................................................ 12-2

Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-29

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-37

Dome light.................................................................. 6-2

Door

Locks..................................................................... 2-6

Open warning light.................................................. 3-23

Double trip meter........................................................ 3-10

Drive belts ............................................................... 11-16

Driving

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-23

AWD models........................................................... 8-5

Car phone/cell phone.................................................. 7

Drinking..................................................................... 6

Drugs........................................................................ 6

Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4

Pets.......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10

Tips ................................................. 7-24, 7-32, 8-2, 8-5

Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7

Winter .................................................................... 8-8

ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-12

Electrical system ...................................................... 12-10

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system........... 7-38

Warning ................................................................ 3-22

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-17

Engine

Compartment overview ........................................... 11-8

Coolant........................................................ 11-13, 12-9

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2

Hood .................................................................... 11-7

Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-18

Oil............................................................... 11-10, 12-4

Overheating .......................................................... 9-12

Starting & stopping........................................... 7-9, 7-12

Event data recorder......................................................... 9

Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5

Floor mat .................................................................. 6-12

Fluid level

Brake .................................................................. 11-18

Clutch.................................................................. 11-19

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ................ 11-17

Fog light ................................................................. 3-102

Bulb .......................................................... 11-42, 12-16

Indicator light......................................................... 3-33

Switch ................................................................ 3-102

Front

Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-17, 12-7

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-25

Side marker light................................................... 11-41

Turn signal/Parking and front side marker light ......... 11-41

Front fog light ................................................. 3-102, 11-42

Bulb.......................................................... 11-42, 12-16

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-33

Switch................................................................. 3-102

Front seats ................................................................. 1-2

Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-4

Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-8

Memory function...................................................... 1-5

Power seat ............................................................. 1-5

Reclining ................................................................ 1-4

Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4

Front side marker ..................................................... 11-41

Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker ............ 11-41

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3

Consumption indicator............................ 3-34, 3-41, 3-49

Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2

Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-5

Gauge................................................................... 3-12

Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3

Fuses ..................................................................... 11-37

Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-12

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-14

Glove box................................................................... 6-6

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-14

Hands-free phone system............................................ 5-71

Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat............................................................... 1-8

Index 14-5

14-6 Index

Rear seat.............................................................. 1-12

Headlight

Beam leveler ....................................................... 3-102

Bulb replacement .................................................. 11-39

Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-16

Control switch........................................................ 3-93

Flasher ................................................................. 3-98

Indicator light......................................................... 3-33

OFF delay function................................................. 3-94

Welcome lighting function ....................................... 3-94

HID headlights.......................................................... 11-39

High beam assist function ........................................... 3-95

Indicator light......................................................... 3-32

High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-32

High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-95

Hill descent control..................................................... 7-43

Indicator light......................................................... 3-33

Hill start assist .................................................. 7-52, 11-21

OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-23

To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-52

Warning light ......................................................... 3-23

HomeLink

.............................................................. 3-109

Hook

Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-16

Convenient............................................................ 6-13

Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13

Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13

Horn........................................................................ 3-119

Hose and connections ............................................... 11-12

Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4

Light ...................................................................... 3-6

Illumination brightness control .................................... 3-101

Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-3

Indicator light (security indicator light)........................ 3-30

Indicator light

BSD/RCTA OFF ............................................. 3-34, 7-65

BSD/RCTA warning ........................................ 3-33, 7-64

Coolant temperature low.......................................... 3-17

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-32

Cruise control set ................................................... 3-32

Front fog light......................................................... 3-33

Headlight............................................................... 3-33

High beam............................................................. 3-32

High beam assist.................................................... 3-32

Hill descent control ................................................. 3-33

Hill start assist OFF ................................................ 3-23

Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-30

Security................................................................. 3-30

Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-31

SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-31

Steering responsive fog lights OFF ........................... 3-33

Turn signal ............................................................ 3-32

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-25

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-25

X-mode ................................................................. 3-33

Information display...................................................... 3-34

Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-107

Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2

Jack and jack handle.................................................... 9-4

Jack-up point............................................................... 9-5

Jump starting............................................................... 9-9

Key ............................................................................ 2-3

Number plate........................................................... 2-3

Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5

Replacement ........................................................... 2-4

Keyless access entry function...................................... 2-13

Keyless access with push-button start system ............... 2-10

Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-17

Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-13

Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-15

Warning chimes and warning light ............................ 3-26

When access key fob does not operate properly........ 9-17

Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-21

Lap belt pretensioner.................................................. 1-27

LCA ......................................................................... 7-60

Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5

License plate light ..................................................... 11-44

Light

Backup ................................................................ 11-42

Cargo area.............................................................. 6-2

Control switch........................................................ 3-93

Daytime running..................................................... 3-98

Dome ..................................................................... 6-2

Front fog.................................................... 3-102, 11-42

Front side marker ....................................... 11-41, 12-16

Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6

License plate ....................................................... 11-44

Map....................................................................... 6-3

Rear combination ................................................. 11-42

Stop.................................................................... 11-42

Tail ..................................................................... 11-42

Turn signal ....................................... 3-100, 11-41, 11-42

Vanity mirror ........................................................... 6-5

Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-12

Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-22

Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-19

Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-38

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule ............................................................... 11-3

Seatbelt................................................................. 1-25

Tips ...................................................................... 11-5

Tools...................................................................... 9-3

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16

Manual

Climate control ........................................................ 4-7

Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-28

Seat....................................................................... 1-4

Transmission ......................................................... 7-22

Transmission oil ........................................... 11-17, 12-7

Map light .................................................................... 6-3

Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-19

Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-9

Index 14-7

14-8 Index

Mirror defogger ......................................................... 3-116

Mirrors.................................................................... 3-107

Moonroof .................................................................. 2-46

Multi function display .................................................. 3-44

Multi information display.............................................. 3-39

New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2

Odometer.................................................................. 3-10

Oil filter.................................................................... 11-11

Oil level

Engine................................................................. 11-10

Front differential gear ............................................ 11-17

Manual transmission.............................................. 11-17

Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-17

Warning light ......................................................... 3-18

Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-18

On-road and off-road driving...................................... 8, 8-6

Outside

Mirror defogger ..................................................... 3-116

Mirrors................................................................. 3-116

Temperature indicator ..................................... 3-35, 3-49

Overhead console........................................................ 6-7

Overheating engine .................................................... 9-12

Parking

Brake ................................................................... 7-48

Brake stroke......................................................... 11-23

Tips ...................................................................... 7-49

Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4

Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3

PIN Code Access ....................................................... 2-20

Power

Door locking switch.................................................. 2-9

Outlets ................................................................... 6-9

Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-116

Rear gate ...................................................... 2-39, 9-20

Seat....................................................................... 1-5

Steering ................................................................ 7-35

Steering warning light.............................................. 3-23

Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-29, 1-73

Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8

Push-button

Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6

Starting and stopping engine.................................... 7-12

RCTA........................................................................ 7-60

Rear

Combination lights ................................................ 11-42

Differential gear oil........................................ 11-17, 12-7

Gate ............................................................. 2-38, 9-19

Turn signal light.................................................... 11-42

Rear seat .................................................................. 1-11

Folding down ......................................................... 1-13

Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-12

Heater................................................................... 1-10

Reclining ............................................................... 1-15

Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-17

How to adjust the rear view image ........................... 5-25

Rear window

Defogger.............................................................. 3-116

Wiper and washer switch ...................................... 3-106

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-34

Recommended

Brake fluid............................................................. 12-9

Clutch fluid................................................... 11-19, 12-9

Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-9

Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4

Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-7

Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-7

Rear differential gear oil.......................................... 12-7

Spark plugs......................................................... 12-10

Refueling .................................................................... 7-5

Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-14

Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-21

Replacement

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-22

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-32

Replacing

Access key fob battery .......................................... 11-45

Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-14

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-25

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery.................. 11-46

Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-39, 12-16

Backup light ......................................................... 11-42

Front fog light ....................................................... 11-42

Halogen headlight ................................................. 11-39

Headlight ............................................................. 11-39

License plate light ................................................. 11-44

Parking light......................................................... 11-41

Rear combination light .......................................... 11-42

Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-42

Stop light............................................................. 11-42

Tail light............................................................... 11-42

Reverse Automatic Braking System .............................. 7-67

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12

Roof molding and crossbar .......................................... 8-15

Roof rack .................................................................. 8-14

Safety

Precautions when driving............................................. 4

Symbol...................................................................... 3

Warnings ................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric ................................................................... 10-5

Front...................................................................... 1-2

Heater.................................................................... 1-9

Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4

Memory function...................................................... 1-5

Power .................................................................... 1-5

Rear ..................................................................... 1-11

Seatbelt................................................................. 4, 1-16

Fastening .............................................................. 1-18

Maintenance .......................................................... 1-25

Pretensioners......................................................... 1-25

Safety tips ............................................................. 1-16

Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-14

Security

Alarm system......................................................... 2-25

Index 14-9

14-10 Index

Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-3

Indicator light......................................................... 3-30

Shock sensors....................................................... 2-31

Select lever

Position indicator ................................................... 3-31

Shift lock function................................................... 7-30

Shock sensors........................................................... 2-31

Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-13

Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-25

SI-DRIVE .................................................................. 7-32

Indicator light......................................................... 3-31

Snow tires........................................................ 8-11, 11-23

Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10

Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-24

Spark plugs.................................................... 11-16, 12-10

Specifications ............................................................ 12-2

Speedometer............................................................. 3-10

SRS

Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-62

Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-52

Side airbag ........................................................... 1-62

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-43

SRS airbag system

Monitors................................................................ 1-70

Servicing............................................................... 1-72

Warning light ......................................................... 3-15

Starting & stopping engine .................................... 7-9, 7-12

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7

Steering responsive fog lights system......................... 3-103

OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-33

Warning indicator ................................................... 3-33

Steering Responsive Headlight..................................... 3-99

Steering switches for audio.......................................... 5-63

Steering wheel

Heated Steering Wheel system .............................. 3-119

Power ................................................................... 7-35

Tilt/telescopic ....................................................... 3-118

Stop light................................................................. 11-42

Storage compartment................................................... 6-6

Sun shade................................................................. 2-47

Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-43

Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-6

Tachometer................................................................ 3-11

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-19

Coolant ................................................................. 3-17

Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2

Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-38, 1-41

Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-13

Tire

Chains .................................................................. 8-11

Inspection............................................................ 11-25

Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-25

Replacement........................................................ 11-29

Rotation .............................................................. 11-28

Size and pressure ................................................ 12-10

Types.................................................................. 11-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-47, 9-8, 11-23

Warning light.......................................................... 3-19

Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-23

Tools .......................................................................... 9-3

Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-38, 1-41

Towing...................................................................... 9-13

All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17

Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16

Hooks................................................................... 9-13

Weight.................................................................. 8-19

Trailer

Connecting............................................................ 8-17

Hitch ............................................................ 8-16, 8-22

Towing.................................................................. 8-19

Towing tips............................................................ 8-23

Trip meter ................................................................. 3-10

Turn signal

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-32

Lever.................................................................. 3-100

Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-17

Valet mode................................................................ 2-30

Vanity mirror................................................................ 6-5

Vehicle

Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-13

Identification ........................................................ 12-19

Symbols .................................................................... 4

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-25

OFF switch ........................................................... 7-41

Operation indicator light........................................... 3-25

System.................................................................. 7-40

Warning light.......................................................... 3-24

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Voice command system operation ................................ 5-81

Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-13

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-26

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14

Warning light

ABS...................................................................... 3-21

Access key............................................................ 3-26

All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-23

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-19

Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-32

Brake system......................................................... 3-21

Charge.................................................................. 3-18

CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-16

Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-17

Door open ............................................................. 3-23

Engine low oil level................................................. 3-18

Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-23

Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-26

Low fuel ................................................................ 3-22

Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-19

Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-18

Power steering ....................................................... 3-23

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14

SRS airbag system................................................. 3-15

Index 14-11

14-12 Index

Steering responsive fog lights system....................... 3-33

Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-24

Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-19

Warning volume

BSD/RCTA............................................................ 3-44

Warranties ..................................................................... 1

Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-19

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators......................................................... 11-27

Welcome lighting function ........................................... 3-94

What to do if (hands-free system or a Bluetooth

device)................................................................... 5-89

Troubleshooting (hands-free system or a Bluetooth

device) ............................................................... 5-89

Wheel

Alloy.................................................................... 11-30

Balance ............................................................... 11-27

Nut tightening torque ............................................ 12-10

Replacement ........................................................ 11-30

Windows................................................................... 2-32

Windshield

Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-30

Wiper and washer switches................................... 3-105

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-33

Wiper deicer......................................................... 3-116

Winter

Driving.................................................................... 8-8

Tires............................................................ 8-11, 11-23

Wiper and washer .................................................... 3-104

Wiper deicer............................................................. 3-116

X-mode ..................................................................... 7-43

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-33

GAS STATION REFERENCE

&Fuel:

!Non-turbo models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

(90 RON) or higher.

!Turbo models

Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON)

or higher is recommended. Unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher may be used with no

detriment to engine durability or driveability. However, you may

notice a slight decrease in maximum engine performance while

using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel. If unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, refer to “Fuel

requirements”F7-3.

&Fuel octane rating:

!RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

!AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

&Fuel capacity:

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

&Engine oil:

Use only the following oils.

.API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-

SERVING”

.or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”

F12-4.

&Engine oil capacity:

Non-turbo models: 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)

Turbo models: 5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil

filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be

checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about

maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil”F11-10.

&Cold tire pressure:

Refer to “Tires”F12-10.

————————————————————————————————————————

2018 Forester Owner’s Manual

A8230BE-A

Issued April 2017

Printed in USA 04/17

2018A

SUBARU CORPORATION

TOKYO, JAPAN

Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,

P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please see

your Subaru Retailer for a Product Brochure

detailing all currently available models.

MSA5M1802A

2018

Love. It’s what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.

Forester

OWNER’S MANUAL

2837712_18a_Subaru_Forester_OM_030717.indd 1 3/7/17 3:27 PM

2018 Subaru Forester Owner Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation